<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=GordonS</id>
	<title>vArranger - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=GordonS"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=Special:Contributions/GordonS"/>
	<updated>2026-04-03T22:38:34Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.39.1</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.12._STATUS_ARRANGER&amp;diff=563</id>
		<title>5.12. STATUS ARRANGER</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.12._STATUS_ARRANGER&amp;diff=563"/>
		<updated>2016-02-18T17:43:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* HOLD */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== ARRANGER STATUS ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig75.jpg | 560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== START ===&lt;br /&gt;
•  With the Arranger stopped, pressing START starts the arranger (right or left click), the button will turn  green  and  the  label  changes  to  STOP. The measure indicator  is  activated, the first of four LEDs indicates highlights (red light), the other, green, show time low. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
•  With the Arranger  running,  pressing  STOP  (right  or  left  click) will immediately  stop  the arranger . The button returns to its orange colour and label changes to START (ready for a new start).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== TEMPO ===&lt;br /&gt;
By successively pressing the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;-&amp;quot; keys, you may increase or decrease the tempo value in steps of + or - 1. The limit values are between 40 and 250.  The  orange-red  arc is  proportional  to  the  value  of  TEMPO and provides coarse adjustment TEMPO, buy click and sliding the mouse along a vertical axis.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;A first double click on the displayed value changes appearance as below:  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig76.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The small padlock in the centre and the yellow circle indicates that the tempo is locked at this rate, from one style to the next. This TEMPO LOCK function allows chaining of other styles on the same TEMPO.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; A  second  double-click  cancels  the TEMPO LOCK function &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : TAP TEMPO: You can define a new tempo by time-clicking with the right mouse button on the TEMPO button. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You may also use OPTIONS -&amp;gt; CONTROLLERS to assign the TAP TEMPO function to a key. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SYNC ===&lt;br /&gt;
This Frame offers two options:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig76a.jpg | 640px  | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; These two options are not mutually  exclusive, checked simultaneously &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; will play only when it receives notes from the LEFT section. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== COUNT IN ===&lt;br /&gt;
When the Arranger is Off, this function gives a metronome (drummer) count-in on the quarter notes of a measure before the arranger starts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When the Arranger is On, the COUNT IN button changes to RESTART. A click on RESTART will immediately reset the arranger on the first beat of the measure. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The functions COUNT IN and RESTART are enabled with either right or left clicks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You may also assign this button to a control or key by using OPTIONS -&amp;gt; CONTROLLERS.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== FADE ===&lt;br /&gt;
•  With the arranger OFF, pressing FADE IN (the button turns red) causes a fade in, upwards from the zero level to the configured sound level. When the sound level reaches the configured level, the changes to FADE OUT and the button returns to grey.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
•  With the arranger running, pressing FADE OUT (the button turns red) causes a sound fade out from the noise programmed to zero. When the sound level reaches zero the label changes back to FADE IN, the button becomes grey and the Arranger is stopped. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : The behaviour of the FADE function is identical in a MIDI sequence or Kar. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== HOLD ===&lt;br /&gt;
The HOLD function, when activated, remembers the last chord played in the LEFT part, even after the keys are released.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When playing a style, it keeps the activation of all the accompaniment, bass and drums tracks.&lt;br /&gt;
Otherwise, when the keys are released only the drums tracks keep playing. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
ARRANGER STATUS commands are all assignable in the menu OPTIONS -&amp;gt; CONTROLLERS, in the TRANSPORT section.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.12._STATUS_ARRANGER&amp;diff=562</id>
		<title>5.12. STATUS ARRANGER</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.12._STATUS_ARRANGER&amp;diff=562"/>
		<updated>2016-02-18T17:39:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* FADE */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== ARRANGER STATUS ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig75.jpg | 560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== START ===&lt;br /&gt;
•  With the Arranger stopped, pressing START starts the arranger (right or left click), the button will turn  green  and  the  label  changes  to  STOP. The measure indicator  is  activated, the first of four LEDs indicates highlights (red light), the other, green, show time low. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
•  With the Arranger  running,  pressing  STOP  (right  or  left  click) will immediately  stop  the arranger . The button returns to its orange colour and label changes to START (ready for a new start).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== TEMPO ===&lt;br /&gt;
By successively pressing the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;-&amp;quot; keys, you may increase or decrease the tempo value in steps of + or - 1. The limit values are between 40 and 250.  The  orange-red  arc is  proportional  to  the  value  of  TEMPO and provides coarse adjustment TEMPO, buy click and sliding the mouse along a vertical axis.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;A first double click on the displayed value changes appearance as below:  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig76.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The small padlock in the centre and the yellow circle indicates that the tempo is locked at this rate, from one style to the next. This TEMPO LOCK function allows chaining of other styles on the same TEMPO.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; A  second  double-click  cancels  the TEMPO LOCK function &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : TAP TEMPO: You can define a new tempo by time-clicking with the right mouse button on the TEMPO button. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You may also use OPTIONS -&amp;gt; CONTROLLERS to assign the TAP TEMPO function to a key. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SYNC ===&lt;br /&gt;
This Frame offers two options:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig76a.jpg | 640px  | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; These two options are not mutually  exclusive, checked simultaneously &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; will play only when it receives notes from the LEFT section. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== COUNT IN ===&lt;br /&gt;
When the Arranger is Off, this function gives a metronome (drummer) count-in on the quarter notes of a measure before the arranger starts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When the Arranger is On, the COUNT IN button changes to RESTART. A click on RESTART will immediately reset the arranger on the first beat of the measure. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The functions COUNT IN and RESTART are enabled with either right or left clicks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You may also assign this button to a control or key by using OPTIONS -&amp;gt; CONTROLLERS.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== FADE ===&lt;br /&gt;
•  With the arranger OFF, pressing FADE IN (the button turns red) causes a fade in, upwards from the zero level to the configured sound level. When the sound level reaches the configured level, the changes to FADE OUT and the button returns to grey.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
•  With the arranger running, pressing FADE OUT (the button turns red) causes a sound fade out from the noise programmed to zero. When the sound level reaches zero the label changes back to FADE IN, the button becomes grey and the Arranger is stopped. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : The behaviour of the FADE function is identical in a MIDI sequence or Kar. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== HOLD ===&lt;br /&gt;
The HOLD function, when activated, allows the last chord played in the LEFT part to stay memorized, even after the keys are released.&lt;br /&gt;
When the style is playing, it keeps the activation of all the accompaniment, bass and drums tracks.&lt;br /&gt;
Otherwise, when the keys are released only the drums tracks keep playing. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
ARRANGER STATUS commands are all assignable in the OPTIONS / CONTROLLERS menu, in the TRANSPORT section.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.12._STATUS_ARRANGER&amp;diff=561</id>
		<title>5.12. STATUS ARRANGER</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.12._STATUS_ARRANGER&amp;diff=561"/>
		<updated>2016-02-18T17:34:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* COUNT IN */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== ARRANGER STATUS ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig75.jpg | 560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== START ===&lt;br /&gt;
•  With the Arranger stopped, pressing START starts the arranger (right or left click), the button will turn  green  and  the  label  changes  to  STOP. The measure indicator  is  activated, the first of four LEDs indicates highlights (red light), the other, green, show time low. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
•  With the Arranger  running,  pressing  STOP  (right  or  left  click) will immediately  stop  the arranger . The button returns to its orange colour and label changes to START (ready for a new start).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== TEMPO ===&lt;br /&gt;
By successively pressing the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;-&amp;quot; keys, you may increase or decrease the tempo value in steps of + or - 1. The limit values are between 40 and 250.  The  orange-red  arc is  proportional  to  the  value  of  TEMPO and provides coarse adjustment TEMPO, buy click and sliding the mouse along a vertical axis.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;A first double click on the displayed value changes appearance as below:  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig76.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The small padlock in the centre and the yellow circle indicates that the tempo is locked at this rate, from one style to the next. This TEMPO LOCK function allows chaining of other styles on the same TEMPO.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; A  second  double-click  cancels  the TEMPO LOCK function &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : TAP TEMPO: You can define a new tempo by time-clicking with the right mouse button on the TEMPO button. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You may also use OPTIONS -&amp;gt; CONTROLLERS to assign the TAP TEMPO function to a key. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SYNC ===&lt;br /&gt;
This Frame offers two options:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig76a.jpg | 640px  | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; These two options are not mutually  exclusive, checked simultaneously &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; will play only when it receives notes from the LEFT section. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== COUNT IN ===&lt;br /&gt;
When the Arranger is Off, this function gives a metronome (drummer) count-in on the quarter notes of a measure before the arranger starts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When the Arranger is On, the COUNT IN button changes to RESTART. A click on RESTART will immediately reset the arranger on the first beat of the measure. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The functions COUNT IN and RESTART are enabled with either right or left clicks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You may also assign this button to a control or key by using OPTIONS -&amp;gt; CONTROLLERS.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== FADE ===&lt;br /&gt;
•  The arranger OFF, pressing FADE IN (the button turns red) causes a fade output fromthe zero level to the noise level programmed. When the noise level reaches the screen is programmed exchange FADE OUT and the button returns to gray.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
•  The arranger START, pressing FADE OUT (the button turns red) causes a sound fade out from the noise programmed to zero. When the noise level reaches zero the screen changes FADE IN, the button becomes gray and the Arranger is stopped. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : The behavior of the FADE function is identical toa MIDI sequence or Kar. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== HOLD ===&lt;br /&gt;
The HOLD function, when activated, allows the last chord played in the LEFT part to stay memorized, even after the keys are released.&lt;br /&gt;
When the style is playing, it keeps the activation of all the accompaniment, bass and drums tracks.&lt;br /&gt;
Otherwise, when the keys are released only the drums tracks keep playing. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
ARRANGER STATUS commands are all assignable in the OPTIONS / CONTROLLERS menu, in the TRANSPORT section.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.12._STATUS_ARRANGER&amp;diff=560</id>
		<title>5.12. STATUS ARRANGER</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.12._STATUS_ARRANGER&amp;diff=560"/>
		<updated>2016-02-18T17:24:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* SYNC */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== ARRANGER STATUS ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig75.jpg | 560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== START ===&lt;br /&gt;
•  With the Arranger stopped, pressing START starts the arranger (right or left click), the button will turn  green  and  the  label  changes  to  STOP. The measure indicator  is  activated, the first of four LEDs indicates highlights (red light), the other, green, show time low. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
•  With the Arranger  running,  pressing  STOP  (right  or  left  click) will immediately  stop  the arranger . The button returns to its orange colour and label changes to START (ready for a new start).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== TEMPO ===&lt;br /&gt;
By successively pressing the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;-&amp;quot; keys, you may increase or decrease the tempo value in steps of + or - 1. The limit values are between 40 and 250.  The  orange-red  arc is  proportional  to  the  value  of  TEMPO and provides coarse adjustment TEMPO, buy click and sliding the mouse along a vertical axis.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;A first double click on the displayed value changes appearance as below:  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig76.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The small padlock in the centre and the yellow circle indicates that the tempo is locked at this rate, from one style to the next. This TEMPO LOCK function allows chaining of other styles on the same TEMPO.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; A  second  double-click  cancels  the TEMPO LOCK function &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : TAP TEMPO: You can define a new tempo by time-clicking with the right mouse button on the TEMPO button. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You may also use OPTIONS -&amp;gt; CONTROLLERS to assign the TAP TEMPO function to a key. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SYNC ===&lt;br /&gt;
This Frame offers two options:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig76a.jpg | 640px  | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; These two options are not mutually  exclusive, checked simultaneously &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; will play only when it receives notes from the LEFT section. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== COUNT IN ===&lt;br /&gt;
Arranger Off, like a drummer, this function is a count of chopsticks on the quarter of a measure heard before the start of the arranger. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Arranger On, the COUNT IN button changes to RESTART, this function immediately reset the arranger on the first beat of the measure. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Functions COUNT IN / RESTART are enabled with right or left clicks. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== FADE ===&lt;br /&gt;
•  The arranger OFF, pressing FADE IN (the button turns red) causes a fade output fromthe zero level to the noise level programmed. When the noise level reaches the screen is programmed exchange FADE OUT and the button returns to gray.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
•  The arranger START, pressing FADE OUT (the button turns red) causes a sound fade out from the noise programmed to zero. When the noise level reaches zero the screen changes FADE IN, the button becomes gray and the Arranger is stopped. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : The behavior of the FADE function is identical toa MIDI sequence or Kar. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== HOLD ===&lt;br /&gt;
The HOLD function, when activated, allows the last chord played in the LEFT part to stay memorized, even after the keys are released.&lt;br /&gt;
When the style is playing, it keeps the activation of all the accompaniment, bass and drums tracks.&lt;br /&gt;
Otherwise, when the keys are released only the drums tracks keep playing. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
ARRANGER STATUS commands are all assignable in the OPTIONS / CONTROLLERS menu, in the TRANSPORT section.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.12._STATUS_ARRANGER&amp;diff=559</id>
		<title>5.12. STATUS ARRANGER</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.12._STATUS_ARRANGER&amp;diff=559"/>
		<updated>2016-02-18T17:23:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* SYNC */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== ARRANGER STATUS ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig75.jpg | 560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== START ===&lt;br /&gt;
•  With the Arranger stopped, pressing START starts the arranger (right or left click), the button will turn  green  and  the  label  changes  to  STOP. The measure indicator  is  activated, the first of four LEDs indicates highlights (red light), the other, green, show time low. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
•  With the Arranger  running,  pressing  STOP  (right  or  left  click) will immediately  stop  the arranger . The button returns to its orange colour and label changes to START (ready for a new start).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== TEMPO ===&lt;br /&gt;
By successively pressing the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;-&amp;quot; keys, you may increase or decrease the tempo value in steps of + or - 1. The limit values are between 40 and 250.  The  orange-red  arc is  proportional  to  the  value  of  TEMPO and provides coarse adjustment TEMPO, buy click and sliding the mouse along a vertical axis.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;A first double click on the displayed value changes appearance as below:  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig76.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The small padlock in the centre and the yellow circle indicates that the tempo is locked at this rate, from one style to the next. This TEMPO LOCK function allows chaining of other styles on the same TEMPO.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; A  second  double-click  cancels  the TEMPO LOCK function &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : TAP TEMPO: You can define a new tempo by time-clicking with the right mouse button on the TEMPO button. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You may also use OPTIONS -&amp;gt; CONTROLLERS to assign the TAP TEMPO function to a key. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SYNC ===&lt;br /&gt;
This Framework offers two options:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig76a.jpg | 640px  | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; These two options are not mutually  exclusive, checked simultaneously &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; will play only when it receives notes from the LEFT section. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== COUNT IN ===&lt;br /&gt;
Arranger Off, like a drummer, this function is a count of chopsticks on the quarter of a measure heard before the start of the arranger. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Arranger On, the COUNT IN button changes to RESTART, this function immediately reset the arranger on the first beat of the measure. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Functions COUNT IN / RESTART are enabled with right or left clicks. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== FADE ===&lt;br /&gt;
•  The arranger OFF, pressing FADE IN (the button turns red) causes a fade output fromthe zero level to the noise level programmed. When the noise level reaches the screen is programmed exchange FADE OUT and the button returns to gray.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
•  The arranger START, pressing FADE OUT (the button turns red) causes a sound fade out from the noise programmed to zero. When the noise level reaches zero the screen changes FADE IN, the button becomes gray and the Arranger is stopped. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : The behavior of the FADE function is identical toa MIDI sequence or Kar. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== HOLD ===&lt;br /&gt;
The HOLD function, when activated, allows the last chord played in the LEFT part to stay memorized, even after the keys are released.&lt;br /&gt;
When the style is playing, it keeps the activation of all the accompaniment, bass and drums tracks.&lt;br /&gt;
Otherwise, when the keys are released only the drums tracks keep playing. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
ARRANGER STATUS commands are all assignable in the OPTIONS / CONTROLLERS menu, in the TRANSPORT section.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.12._STATUS_ARRANGER&amp;diff=558</id>
		<title>5.12. STATUS ARRANGER</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.12._STATUS_ARRANGER&amp;diff=558"/>
		<updated>2016-02-18T17:22:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* TEMPO */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== ARRANGER STATUS ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig75.jpg | 560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== START ===&lt;br /&gt;
•  With the Arranger stopped, pressing START starts the arranger (right or left click), the button will turn  green  and  the  label  changes  to  STOP. The measure indicator  is  activated, the first of four LEDs indicates highlights (red light), the other, green, show time low. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
•  With the Arranger  running,  pressing  STOP  (right  or  left  click) will immediately  stop  the arranger . The button returns to its orange colour and label changes to START (ready for a new start).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== TEMPO ===&lt;br /&gt;
By successively pressing the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;-&amp;quot; keys, you may increase or decrease the tempo value in steps of + or - 1. The limit values are between 40 and 250.  The  orange-red  arc is  proportional  to  the  value  of  TEMPO and provides coarse adjustment TEMPO, buy click and sliding the mouse along a vertical axis.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;A first double click on the displayed value changes appearance as below:  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig76.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The small padlock in the centre and the yellow circle indicates that the tempo is locked at this rate, from one style to the next. This TEMPO LOCK function allows chaining of other styles on the same TEMPO.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; A  second  double-click  cancels  the TEMPO LOCK function &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : TAP TEMPO: You can define a new tempo by time-clicking with the right mouse button on the TEMPO button. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You may also use OPTIONS -&amp;gt; CONTROLLERS to assign the TAP TEMPO function to a key. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SYNC ===&lt;br /&gt;
This Framework offers two options:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig76a.jpg | 640px  | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; These two options are not mutually  exclusive, checked simultaneously &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; play only when notes to it from the LEFT section. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== COUNT IN ===&lt;br /&gt;
Arranger Off, like a drummer, this function is a count of chopsticks on the quarter of a measure heard before the start of the arranger. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Arranger On, the COUNT IN button changes to RESTART, this function immediately reset the arranger on the first beat of the measure. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Functions COUNT IN / RESTART are enabled with right or left clicks. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== FADE ===&lt;br /&gt;
•  The arranger OFF, pressing FADE IN (the button turns red) causes a fade output fromthe zero level to the noise level programmed. When the noise level reaches the screen is programmed exchange FADE OUT and the button returns to gray.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
•  The arranger START, pressing FADE OUT (the button turns red) causes a sound fade out from the noise programmed to zero. When the noise level reaches zero the screen changes FADE IN, the button becomes gray and the Arranger is stopped. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : The behavior of the FADE function is identical toa MIDI sequence or Kar. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== HOLD ===&lt;br /&gt;
The HOLD function, when activated, allows the last chord played in the LEFT part to stay memorized, even after the keys are released.&lt;br /&gt;
When the style is playing, it keeps the activation of all the accompaniment, bass and drums tracks.&lt;br /&gt;
Otherwise, when the keys are released only the drums tracks keep playing. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
ARRANGER STATUS commands are all assignable in the OPTIONS / CONTROLLERS menu, in the TRANSPORT section.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.12._STATUS_ARRANGER&amp;diff=557</id>
		<title>5.12. STATUS ARRANGER</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.12._STATUS_ARRANGER&amp;diff=557"/>
		<updated>2016-02-18T15:36:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* START */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== ARRANGER STATUS ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig75.jpg | 560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== START ===&lt;br /&gt;
•  With the Arranger stopped, pressing START starts the arranger (right or left click), the button will turn  green  and  the  label  changes  to  STOP. The measure indicator  is  activated, the first of four LEDs indicates highlights (red light), the other, green, show time low. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
•  With the Arranger  running,  pressing  STOP  (right  or  left  click) will immediately  stop  the arranger . The button returns to its orange colour and label changes to START (ready for a new start).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== TEMPO ===&lt;br /&gt;
By successively pressing the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;-&amp;quot; keys, it is possible to increase or decrease the tempo value in steps of + or - 1. The limit values are between 40 and 250 minimum for the maximum. An  arc  of  orange-red  circle  whose  opening  is  proportional  to  the  value  of  TEMPO  provides coarse adjustment TEMPO, sliding the mouse along a vertical axis. In addition, a first double click on the displayed value changes appearance as below:  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig76.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The appearance of a small padlock in the center anda yellow circle indicates periphery GEL TEMPO. This TEMPO LOCK function allows chaining of other styles on the same TEMPO. A  second  double-click  resets  the  tempo  indicator  in its  original  definition  and  cancels  the TEMPO LOCK function &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : TAP TEMPO: You can define a new tempo, time clicking with the right mouse button on the wheel TEMPO button. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In OPTIONS / CONTROLLERS, you can assign a key to the TAP TEMPO function. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SYNC ===&lt;br /&gt;
This Framework offers two options:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig76a.jpg | 640px  | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; These two options are not mutually  exclusive, checked simultaneously &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; play only when notes to it from the LEFT section. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== COUNT IN ===&lt;br /&gt;
Arranger Off, like a drummer, this function is a count of chopsticks on the quarter of a measure heard before the start of the arranger. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Arranger On, the COUNT IN button changes to RESTART, this function immediately reset the arranger on the first beat of the measure. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Functions COUNT IN / RESTART are enabled with right or left clicks. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== FADE ===&lt;br /&gt;
•  The arranger OFF, pressing FADE IN (the button turns red) causes a fade output fromthe zero level to the noise level programmed. When the noise level reaches the screen is programmed exchange FADE OUT and the button returns to gray.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
•  The arranger START, pressing FADE OUT (the button turns red) causes a sound fade out from the noise programmed to zero. When the noise level reaches zero the screen changes FADE IN, the button becomes gray and the Arranger is stopped. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : The behavior of the FADE function is identical toa MIDI sequence or Kar. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== HOLD ===&lt;br /&gt;
The HOLD function, when activated, allows the last chord played in the LEFT part to stay memorized, even after the keys are released.&lt;br /&gt;
When the style is playing, it keeps the activation of all the accompaniment, bass and drums tracks.&lt;br /&gt;
Otherwise, when the keys are released only the drums tracks keep playing. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
ARRANGER STATUS commands are all assignable in the OPTIONS / CONTROLLERS menu, in the TRANSPORT section.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.12._STATUS_ARRANGER&amp;diff=556</id>
		<title>5.12. STATUS ARRANGER</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.12._STATUS_ARRANGER&amp;diff=556"/>
		<updated>2016-02-18T15:33:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* STATUS ARRANGER */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== ARRANGER STATUS ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig75.jpg | 560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== START ===&lt;br /&gt;
•  Arranger stopped, pressing START starts the arranger (right or left click), the button will turn  green  and  the  screen  changes  to  STOP. The measurement indicator  is  activated, the first of four LEDs indicates highlights (red light), the other, green, show time low. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
•  Arranger  running,  pressing  STOP  stops  immediately  arranger  (right  or  left  click). The button returns to its orange color and screen changes START (ready for a new start).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== TEMPO ===&lt;br /&gt;
By successively pressing the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;-&amp;quot; keys, it is possible to increase or decrease the tempo value in steps of + or - 1. The limit values are between 40 and 250 minimum for the maximum. An  arc  of  orange-red  circle  whose  opening  is  proportional  to  the  value  of  TEMPO  provides coarse adjustment TEMPO, sliding the mouse along a vertical axis. In addition, a first double click on the displayed value changes appearance as below:  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig76.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The appearance of a small padlock in the center anda yellow circle indicates periphery GEL TEMPO. This TEMPO LOCK function allows chaining of other styles on the same TEMPO. A  second  double-click  resets  the  tempo  indicator  in its  original  definition  and  cancels  the TEMPO LOCK function &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : TAP TEMPO: You can define a new tempo, time clicking with the right mouse button on the wheel TEMPO button. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In OPTIONS / CONTROLLERS, you can assign a key to the TAP TEMPO function. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SYNC ===&lt;br /&gt;
This Framework offers two options:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig76a.jpg | 640px  | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; These two options are not mutually  exclusive, checked simultaneously &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; play only when notes to it from the LEFT section. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== COUNT IN ===&lt;br /&gt;
Arranger Off, like a drummer, this function is a count of chopsticks on the quarter of a measure heard before the start of the arranger. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Arranger On, the COUNT IN button changes to RESTART, this function immediately reset the arranger on the first beat of the measure. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Functions COUNT IN / RESTART are enabled with right or left clicks. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== FADE ===&lt;br /&gt;
•  The arranger OFF, pressing FADE IN (the button turns red) causes a fade output fromthe zero level to the noise level programmed. When the noise level reaches the screen is programmed exchange FADE OUT and the button returns to gray.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
•  The arranger START, pressing FADE OUT (the button turns red) causes a sound fade out from the noise programmed to zero. When the noise level reaches zero the screen changes FADE IN, the button becomes gray and the Arranger is stopped. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : The behavior of the FADE function is identical toa MIDI sequence or Kar. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== HOLD ===&lt;br /&gt;
The HOLD function, when activated, allows the last chord played in the LEFT part to stay memorized, even after the keys are released.&lt;br /&gt;
When the style is playing, it keeps the activation of all the accompaniment, bass and drums tracks.&lt;br /&gt;
Otherwise, when the keys are released only the drums tracks keep playing. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
ARRANGER STATUS commands are all assignable in the OPTIONS / CONTROLLERS menu, in the TRANSPORT section.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.11._REALTIME_ARRANGER&amp;diff=555</id>
		<title>5.11. REALTIME ARRANGER</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.11._REALTIME_ARRANGER&amp;diff=555"/>
		<updated>2016-02-18T15:31:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* REAL TIME CONTROL ARRANGER */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== REAL TIME CONTROL ARRANGER ==&lt;br /&gt;
The  control  of  the  arranger  comes  in  different  views,  depending  on  the  origin  of the  STYLE &lt;br /&gt;
loaded, for example:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig72.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig73.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== INTRO ===&lt;br /&gt;
By  default,  &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;  does not select an  &#039;&#039;&#039;INTRO&#039;&#039;&#039;.  An &#039;&#039;&#039;INTRO&#039;&#039;&#039; provides  up  to  three  variations  for  the  introduction from the simpler  (No.  1  or  A)  to  the  richest  (3,  C). The  length  of  the  introduction  is  variable depending  on  the  style,  but  never  less  than  one  measure.  The length  appears  in &#039;&#039;&#039;FRAME A&#039;&#039;&#039;  as a blue horizontal progress bar. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
With the arranger stopped, select an &#039;&#039;&#039;INTRO&#039;&#039;&#039; pattern (1, 2 or3), and the button turns red.  Press &#039;&#039;&#039;START&#039;&#039;&#039; and the arranger will plays the selected INTRO and then step to &#039;&#039;&#039;VARIATION A&#039;&#039;&#039;, or to any other variation you have previously selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
During your song, you can again replay the INTRO, by simply clicking on the relevant INTRO button.. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== VARIATION ===&lt;br /&gt;
Depending  to the origin of the style, &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; offers up to four &#039;&#039;&#039;Variations&#039;&#039;&#039;: A, B, C and D or RIFF, and up to five &#039;&#039;&#039;Fill In&#039;&#039;&#039;s. These variations each have a different pattern of support in general from simple &amp;quot;A&amp;quot; to the richest &amp;quot;D&amp;quot;.  Some original Ketron styles offer RIFF instead of variation &amp;quot;D&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;RIFF&#039;&#039;&#039;  is  a  pre  recorded  musical  phrase  of  several  measures.  Up  to  32  steps,  its  length  is indicated by the blue horizontal progress bar in FRAME A, the harmonic grid changes in into an agreement with the note played just  before  entering  this  variation.  This  feature  is  very  popular  for enhancing the musician&#039;s improvisation on a given grid. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The change over is indicated by the blue colour of the button. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== FILL IN ===&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the style, &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; provides up to three reasons for variations of FILL and BREAK; more for Ketron styles, and up to 5 FILL &lt;br /&gt;
IN for YAMAHA styles. By default, no FILL IN is selected. The buttons change colour upon selection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the Arranger Off, selecting a FILL or BREAK will start the arranger with that the FILL or BREAK.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  framework  is  provided  with  a  button [[File:Fig73a.jpg | 60px]] which  turns  red  when  selected.  This will then automatically start a FILL when changing a VARIATION according to the following arrangement:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle10.jpg | 360px | center]] &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ENDING ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; provides up to four types of ending, from the simplest to the richest, the length of the ending varies, but is never less than one measure. It appears in FRAME A as the blue horizontal progress bar. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : If you start the arranger on an ENDING, &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; will stop at the end of that pattern. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
All  commands  can  be  assigned  by  the  arranger menu:  OPTIONS  -&amp;gt;  CONTROLLERS  -&amp;gt; CONDUCTOR.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MARKERS ===&lt;br /&gt;
When &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; reads  a  sequence,  the  control  panel  of  the  arranger  becomes  a series of MARKERS which look like the following.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig74.jpg | 640px | center]] &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A  &#039;&#039;&#039;MARKER&#039;&#039;&#039;  is  used  for  finding a  precise  position within a MIDI  file.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; displays the markers present in the MIDI file, in the area of variations arranger. A clicking on a marker &lt;br /&gt;
button, sets the MIDI file directly to the start position of this marker.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If  the  MIDI  file  is  being  played,  the  position  change  will  take  place  at  the  end  of  the  measure, for a smooth transition. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is very useful if, for example, your require and additional chorus. Click on the marker Chorus, and  at  the  end  of  the  current  measure &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; will chain perfectly to that chorus.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In menu &#039;&#039;&#039;OPTIONS -&amp;gt; CONTROLLERS, you may assign up to 15 tags to MIDI buttons, piano keys or PC keys ... (Section MARKERS).&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You may also use the functions assigned to VARIATION UP and VARIATION DOWN keys to move through the markers, with the ability to support several steps in a row. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The third option is to use the control usually assigned to variations in key arranger. To do this, use a MIDI file editor and name tags, so that they contain: Intro 1, Into 2 or intro 3, or Ending 1, Ending 2 or 3 or 4, or Main A or B or C or Main Hand D or Fill In 1 or 2 or 3 or Fill In Fill In Break.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if the marker is called &amp;quot;Main C&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Solo Guitar Main  C&amp;quot;,  you  can  go  to  the  position  of  the  marker  by  pressing  the  button  or  pedal assigned to arranger variation 3.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.10._MIXER&amp;diff=554</id>
		<title>5.10. MIXER</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.10._MIXER&amp;diff=554"/>
		<updated>2016-02-18T14:43:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* SECTION SOUND EDIT */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== THE MIXER PANEL ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The mixer group has 16 &#039;strips&#039;, one for each &#039;track&#039; as in the image below. Each track represents one of the 16 midi channels of the multitimbral midi synthesizer.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt; Each track can be one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;An arranger track&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;A midifile track&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;A left hand track&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;A right hand track &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI channel numbering can be confusing. MIDI Channels are named 1 to 16, but they are represented by physical numbers that are one less than that, i.e., 0 to 15. The numbers shown below are the &#039;&#039;physical&#039;&#039; number. To get the MIDI logical channel number,  Please add +1 to all &amp;quot;Channel MIDI&amp;quot; in left column&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Generally you can check this by looking at the number for the drums channel, which by convention is normally MIDI logical channel 10.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;As and example: RIGHT1 below is MIDI Channel 13&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Please not also that the mixer strips in arranger mode are ordered as in the centre column below. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;For MIDI and Karaoke files, the channels to which the sounds are sent, and that the strips control, are in the right-most column below.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle7.jpg | 480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The following may be clearer &#039;&#039;&#039;if I have it correctly&#039;&#039;&#039;. All MIDI/Track numbers below are MIDI channel names 1 to 16, rather than the physical coding 0 to 15&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td colspan=4 align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Try a table version&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Strip&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Arranger&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;MID/KAR Play&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Number&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track Name&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;MIDI channel&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;MIDI Channel&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Drums&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;10&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Percussion&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;9&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Bass&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;4&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Accomp 1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 4&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Accomp 2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;7&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 5&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Accomp 3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;8&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 6&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;7&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Accomp 4&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;11&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 7&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;8&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Accomp 5&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;12&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 8&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;9&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Left 1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 9&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;10&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Left 2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;4&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Drums 10&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;11&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Left 3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 11&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;12&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Right 1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;13&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 12&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;13&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Right 2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;14&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 13&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;14&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Right 3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;15&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 14&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;15&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Right 4&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;16&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 15&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;16&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2nd Voice&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 16&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;A mixer strip.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[File:Fig65.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Item&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th&amp;gt;Observations&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;TRACK 3 in PLAYER MODE or SEQUENCE MODE or BASS ARRANGER&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Timbre name assigned to this track.  A click on the track turns it red and the&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;vertical column timbres appears to the left for a possible change of timbre.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Double-click displays the SOUND EDIT window for any changes.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Right-click to display a popup window.&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Volume slider.  Slide up to increase the sound level is increased, slide down to reduce it.&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;4&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;The sound level set by the volume slider.&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;The sound meter for this mixer strip&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;The SOLO button allows you to listen to this one track only.  Coloured green when active.&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;7&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;The MUTE button turns off this track.  Coloured orange when active.&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;8&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;The PAN indicator shows the left/right setting of the track. C for centre, 64L (left) or 63R (right)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;at the extremes.  Adjust the Panning by moving the dark blue button left or right.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;A light blue line indicates the position relative to centre.&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;9&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Shows the name of FX2. Three dashes indicates off. Click on the name to select the FX2&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;effect to apply to the sound.&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;10&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;A rotary control (*) for effect FX1 that controls the amount of the affect to apply to the track.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The red arc indicates the level from 0 to 127(**) Black indicates that no effect is applied&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;11&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;A rotary control (*) for effect FX2 that controls the amount of the affect to apply to the track.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The green arc indicates the level from 0 to 127(**) Black indicates that no effect is applied&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;12&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Shows the &#039;&#039;&#039;Expression&#039;&#039;&#039; level (MIDI control 11) as a red line on the meter of each track.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Expression acts as a volume control for the track.&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Click on the knob and slide up or down to change the setting&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;**&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Hover the cursor over the knob to see it&#039;s value.&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==  SECTION SOUND EDIT ==&lt;br /&gt;
Double-click on one of the 16 tracks to open the SOUND EDIT window. Once the window is open, a single click on any other track will change the the SOUND EDIT window to that track. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig66.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The tracks  LEFT 1, 2, 3, RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4 and 2nd VOICE, allow you to create simple or more complex presets. The following parameters are added: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;A keyboard play area:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;Key From&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Key To&#039;&#039;&#039; allow you to select the range of keys(notes) for an action.&lt;br /&gt;
::: Define the &#039;&#039;&#039;Key From&#039;&#039;&#039; note by clicking on the displayed value and then play the desired note  on the keyboard (the note number will be displayed.). &lt;br /&gt;
::: Define the &#039;&#039;&#039;Key To&#039;&#039;&#039; note by clicking on the displayed value and then play the desired note on the keyboard (which may not be lower than (to the left of) the &#039;&#039;&#039;Key From&#039;&#039;&#039;). &lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;A velocity range:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;Velocity From&#039;&#039;&#039; Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will be generated. A low value corresponds to &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; the maximum is &amp;quot;Sforzando.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;Velocity To&#039;&#039;&#039; Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will no longer generated. This value may not be less than &#039;&#039;&#039;Velocity From&#039;&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;An octave change.&#039;&#039;&#039; up or down.&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;A transposition in semitones.&#039;&#039;&#039; up or down.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These tracks allow you, for example, to produce a different tone and a different velocity according to the octave played&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig67.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once these parameters are set, you can save the preset using &#039;&#039;&#039;SAVE SOUND&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Additional  for the &#039;&#039;&#039;DRUM&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;PERC&#039;&#039;&#039; tracks only&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::Right-click on the DRUM or PERC track and select &#039;&#039;&#039;DRUM MIXER...&#039;&#039;&#039; to access the additional extra settings for the percussion tracks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig68.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Special notes for the &#039;&#039;&#039;BASS&#039;&#039;&#039; track&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You may save the MANUAL BASS SUSTAIN. To do this, select Manual Bass, double click on the bass track, and change the value of the Release Time. You can then save this setting in SAVE STARTUP CONFIG.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SAVE SOUND ==&lt;br /&gt;
SAVE RIGHT SOUND is available from the button [[File:Fig68a.jpg | 120px]]&lt;br /&gt;
and &amp;quot;SOUND ...&amp;quot; The following parameters are stored in SAVE RIGHT SOUND: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle9.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By combining up to 5 tracks (RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4 and 2nd VOICE) it is easy to create new complex sounds. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== CONTEXT MENU TRACK ==&lt;br /&gt;
Right click on a track displays a context menu that allows the following selections: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, right click ACCOMP4:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig69.jpg | 360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===  SEND TO MIDI ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  menu  allows  you  to  route  MIDI  track  this  information  to  multiple  MIDI  outputs,  these &lt;br /&gt;
choices are not mutually exclusive. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : It is possible to use multiple MIDI interfaces with the same names of MIDI ports.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SOUND EDIT ...  ===&lt;br /&gt;
See Section 5.10.2 SOUND EDIT &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DRUM MIXER ...  ===&lt;br /&gt;
See Section xxx DRUM MIXER &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== STYLE MIXER ... ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  command  displays  summary  screen  settings  current  style  for  each  track,  and  each &lt;br /&gt;
variation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig70.jpg |780| center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== GROUP MASTER/EFFECTS ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig71.jpg |240| center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This group has 4 channels and adjustment effects two groups: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The first track named &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG, we read a sequence or an audio file, or STYLE &#039;&#039;&#039; for the use of a &lt;br /&gt;
style rule by moving the cursor vertical level of the sequence, or the audio file type (0-127) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The second channel named [[File:Fig71b.jpg | 40px ]] adjusted by means of the vertical level of the cursor LEFT section (0 to 127). This path can be selected, which causes the display option [[File:Fig71c.jpg | 90px ]] in VOICE. This feature allows you to associate a bar SOUNDS MY STYLE. A right-click displays &lt;br /&gt;
the popup menu cf. 5.10.4. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  third  path  named in [[File:Fig71d.jpg | 50px ]] adjusted  by  means  of  the  vertical  level  of  the  cursor  RIGHT section (0 to 127). This path can be selected, which causes the column display stamps allowing choice. A right-click displays the popup menu cf. 5.10.4. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth track named  MAST rule acting on the vertical [[File:Fig71e.jpg | 50px ]] rule acting on the vertical slider overall output  level (MASTER) from 0 to 127.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Above, another digital indicator shows white numerals on a black background, it is of polyphony, &lt;br /&gt;
in other words, the number of notes &amp;quot;ON&amp;quot; sent to the sound module. This allows for example, &lt;br /&gt;
whether &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; is receiving MIDI data from the device connected to MIDI IN. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  first  group  of  effects  named  FX1-REVERB  can  select  a  reverb  type  from  eight  types  of &lt;br /&gt;
which OFF (no reverb). The choice is made by clicking on the name of the REVERB in use, a &lt;br /&gt;
drop-down list displays the different reverbs available. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By  clicking  on  the  bottom  of  the  window &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It  clears  the  combo  box  without  applying  the &lt;br /&gt;
changes. &lt;br /&gt;
The maximum level is adjustable reverb chosen in another drop-down list of values: 0 to 16. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The second effect group named FX2 can choose different types of CHORUS DELAY DISTO to &lt;br /&gt;
be applied to different tracks &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Eight different types are available including an  OFF for all &lt;br /&gt;
three FX2 effects. By clicking on the bottom of thewindow &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It clears the combo box without &lt;br /&gt;
applying the changes. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.10._MIXER&amp;diff=553</id>
		<title>5.10. MIXER</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.10._MIXER&amp;diff=553"/>
		<updated>2016-02-18T14:15:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* THE MIXER PANEL */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== THE MIXER PANEL ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The mixer group has 16 &#039;strips&#039;, one for each &#039;track&#039; as in the image below. Each track represents one of the 16 midi channels of the multitimbral midi synthesizer.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt; Each track can be one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;An arranger track&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;A midifile track&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;A left hand track&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;A right hand track &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI channel numbering can be confusing. MIDI Channels are named 1 to 16, but they are represented by physical numbers that are one less than that, i.e., 0 to 15. The numbers shown below are the &#039;&#039;physical&#039;&#039; number. To get the MIDI logical channel number,  Please add +1 to all &amp;quot;Channel MIDI&amp;quot; in left column&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Generally you can check this by looking at the number for the drums channel, which by convention is normally MIDI logical channel 10.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;As and example: RIGHT1 below is MIDI Channel 13&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Please not also that the mixer strips in arranger mode are ordered as in the centre column below. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;For MIDI and Karaoke files, the channels to which the sounds are sent, and that the strips control, are in the right-most column below.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle7.jpg | 480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The following may be clearer &#039;&#039;&#039;if I have it correctly&#039;&#039;&#039;. All MIDI/Track numbers below are MIDI channel names 1 to 16, rather than the physical coding 0 to 15&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td colspan=4 align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Try a table version&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Strip&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Arranger&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;MID/KAR Play&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Number&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track Name&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;MIDI channel&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;MIDI Channel&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Drums&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;10&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Percussion&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;9&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Bass&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;4&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Accomp 1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 4&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Accomp 2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;7&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 5&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Accomp 3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;8&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 6&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;7&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Accomp 4&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;11&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 7&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;8&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Accomp 5&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;12&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 8&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;9&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Left 1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 9&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;10&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Left 2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;4&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Drums 10&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;11&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Left 3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 11&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;12&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Right 1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;13&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 12&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;13&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Right 2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;14&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 13&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;14&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Right 3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;15&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 14&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;15&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Right 4&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;16&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 15&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;16&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2nd Voice&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 16&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;A mixer strip.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[File:Fig65.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Item&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th&amp;gt;Observations&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;TRACK 3 in PLAYER MODE or SEQUENCE MODE or BASS ARRANGER&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Timbre name assigned to this track.  A click on the track turns it red and the&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;vertical column timbres appears to the left for a possible change of timbre.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Double-click displays the SOUND EDIT window for any changes.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Right-click to display a popup window.&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Volume slider.  Slide up to increase the sound level is increased, slide down to reduce it.&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;4&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;The sound level set by the volume slider.&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;The sound meter for this mixer strip&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;The SOLO button allows you to listen to this one track only.  Coloured green when active.&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;7&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;The MUTE button turns off this track.  Coloured orange when active.&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;8&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;The PAN indicator shows the left/right setting of the track. C for centre, 64L (left) or 63R (right)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;at the extremes.  Adjust the Panning by moving the dark blue button left or right.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;A light blue line indicates the position relative to centre.&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;9&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Shows the name of FX2. Three dashes indicates off. Click on the name to select the FX2&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;effect to apply to the sound.&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;10&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;A rotary control (*) for effect FX1 that controls the amount of the affect to apply to the track.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The red arc indicates the level from 0 to 127(**) Black indicates that no effect is applied&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;11&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;A rotary control (*) for effect FX2 that controls the amount of the affect to apply to the track.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The green arc indicates the level from 0 to 127(**) Black indicates that no effect is applied&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;12&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Shows the &#039;&#039;&#039;Expression&#039;&#039;&#039; level (MIDI control 11) as a red line on the meter of each track.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Expression acts as a volume control for the track.&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Click on the knob and slide up or down to change the setting&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;**&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Hover the cursor over the knob to see it&#039;s value.&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==  SECTION SOUND EDIT ==&lt;br /&gt;
Double-click on one of the 16 tracks to open the SOUND EDIT window. Once the window is open, a single click on any other track will change the the SOUND EDIT window to that track. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig66.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4, 2nd VOICE, LEFT 1, 2, 3 tracks allows to create simple or more complex presets, and the following parameters are added: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;A keyboard play area:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;Key From&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Key To&#039;&#039;&#039; allow you to select the range of keys(notes) for an action.&lt;br /&gt;
::: Define the &#039;&#039;&#039;Key From&#039;&#039;&#039; note by clicking on the displayed value and then play the keyboard the desired note (the number will be displayed.). &lt;br /&gt;
::: Define the &#039;&#039;&#039;Key To&#039;&#039;&#039; note by clicking on the displayed value and then play the keyboard the desired note (which may not be less than &#039;&#039;&#039;From Key&#039;&#039;&#039;). &lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;A velocity range:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;Velocity From&#039;&#039;&#039; Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will be generated. A low value corresponds to &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; the maximum is &amp;quot;Sforzando.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;Velocity To&#039;&#039;&#039; Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will no longer generated. This value can not be less than Velocity From. &lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;An octave change.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;A transposition in semitones.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These special lanes and 2nd RIGHT and LEFT VOICE allow for example to produce a different tone and a different velocity according to the octave played&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig67.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once these parameters are set, you can save the preset using &#039;&#039;&#039;SAVE SOUND&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Additional for the &#039;&#039;&#039;DRUM&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;PERC&#039;&#039;&#039; tracks only&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::Right-click on the DRUM or PERC track and select &#039;&#039;&#039;DRUM MIXER...&#039;&#039;&#039; to access the additional extra settings for the percussion tracks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig68.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Particularity of the &#039;&#039;&#039;BASS&#039;&#039;&#039; track&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You have the ability to save the MANUAL BASS SUSTAIN. To do this, select Manual Bass, double click on the bass track, and change the value of the Release Time. You can then save this setting in SAVE STARTUP CONFIG.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SAVE SOUND ==&lt;br /&gt;
SAVE RIGHT SOUND is available from the button [[File:Fig68a.jpg | 120px]]&lt;br /&gt;
and &amp;quot;SOUND ...&amp;quot; The following parameters are stored in SAVE RIGHT SOUND: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle9.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By combining up to 5 tracks (RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4 and 2nd VOICE) it is easy to create new complex sounds. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== CONTEXT MENU TRACK ==&lt;br /&gt;
Right click on a track displays a context menu that allows the following selections: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, right click ACCOMP4:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig69.jpg | 360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===  SEND TO MIDI ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  menu  allows  you  to  route  MIDI  track  this  information  to  multiple  MIDI  outputs,  these &lt;br /&gt;
choices are not mutually exclusive. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : It is possible to use multiple MIDI interfaces with the same names of MIDI ports.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SOUND EDIT ...  ===&lt;br /&gt;
See Section 5.10.2 SOUND EDIT &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DRUM MIXER ...  ===&lt;br /&gt;
See Section xxx DRUM MIXER &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== STYLE MIXER ... ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  command  displays  summary  screen  settings  current  style  for  each  track,  and  each &lt;br /&gt;
variation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig70.jpg |780| center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== GROUP MASTER/EFFECTS ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig71.jpg |240| center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This group has 4 channels and adjustment effects two groups: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The first track named &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG, we read a sequence or an audio file, or STYLE &#039;&#039;&#039; for the use of a &lt;br /&gt;
style rule by moving the cursor vertical level of the sequence, or the audio file type (0-127) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The second channel named [[File:Fig71b.jpg | 40px ]] adjusted by means of the vertical level of the cursor LEFT section (0 to 127). This path can be selected, which causes the display option [[File:Fig71c.jpg | 90px ]] in VOICE. This feature allows you to associate a bar SOUNDS MY STYLE. A right-click displays &lt;br /&gt;
the popup menu cf. 5.10.4. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  third  path  named in [[File:Fig71d.jpg | 50px ]] adjusted  by  means  of  the  vertical  level  of  the  cursor  RIGHT section (0 to 127). This path can be selected, which causes the column display stamps allowing choice. A right-click displays the popup menu cf. 5.10.4. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth track named  MAST rule acting on the vertical [[File:Fig71e.jpg | 50px ]] rule acting on the vertical slider overall output  level (MASTER) from 0 to 127.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Above, another digital indicator shows white numerals on a black background, it is of polyphony, &lt;br /&gt;
in other words, the number of notes &amp;quot;ON&amp;quot; sent to the sound module. This allows for example, &lt;br /&gt;
whether &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; is receiving MIDI data from the device connected to MIDI IN. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  first  group  of  effects  named  FX1-REVERB  can  select  a  reverb  type  from  eight  types  of &lt;br /&gt;
which OFF (no reverb). The choice is made by clicking on the name of the REVERB in use, a &lt;br /&gt;
drop-down list displays the different reverbs available. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By  clicking  on  the  bottom  of  the  window &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It  clears  the  combo  box  without  applying  the &lt;br /&gt;
changes. &lt;br /&gt;
The maximum level is adjustable reverb chosen in another drop-down list of values: 0 to 16. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The second effect group named FX2 can choose different types of CHORUS DELAY DISTO to &lt;br /&gt;
be applied to different tracks &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Eight different types are available including an  OFF for all &lt;br /&gt;
three FX2 effects. By clicking on the bottom of thewindow &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It clears the combo box without &lt;br /&gt;
applying the changes. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.10._MIXER&amp;diff=552</id>
		<title>5.10. MIXER</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.10._MIXER&amp;diff=552"/>
		<updated>2016-02-17T15:48:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* SECTION SOUND EDIT */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== THE MIXER PANEL ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The mixer group has 16 &#039;strips&#039;, one for each &#039;track&#039; as in the image below. Each track represents one of the 16 midi channels of the multitimbral midi synthesizer.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt; Each track can be one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;An arranger track&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;A midifile track&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;A left hand track&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;A right hand track &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI channel numbering can be confusing. MIDI Channels are named 1 to 16, but they are represented by physical numbers that are one less than that, i.e., 0 to 15. The numbers shown below are the &#039;&#039;physical&#039;&#039; number. To get the MIDI logical channel number,  Please add +1 to all &amp;quot;Channel MIDI&amp;quot; in left column&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Generally you can check this by looking at the number for the drums channel, which by convention is normally MIDI logical channel 10.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;As and example: RIGHT1 below is MIDI Channel 13&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Please not also that the mixer strips in arranger mode are ordered as in the centre column below. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;For MIDI and Karaoke files, the channels to which the sounds are sent, and that the strips control, are in the right-most column below.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle7.jpg | 480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The following may be clearer &#039;&#039;&#039;if I have it correctly&#039;&#039;&#039;. All MIDI/Track numbers below are MIDI channel names 1 to 16, rather than the physical coding 0 to 15&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td colspan=4 align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Try a table version&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Strip&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Arranger&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;MID/KAR Play&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Number&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track Name&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;MIDI channel&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;MIDI Channel&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Drums&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;10&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Percussion&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;9&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Bass&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;4&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Accomp 1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 4&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Accomp 2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;7&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 5&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Accomp 3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;8&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 6&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;7&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Accomp 4&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;11&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 7&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;8&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Accomp 5&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;12&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 8&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;9&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Left 1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 9&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;10&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Left 2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;4&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Drums 10&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;11&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Left 3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 11&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;12&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Right 1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;13&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 12&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;13&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Right 2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;14&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 13&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;14&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Right 3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;15&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 14&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;15&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Right 4&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;16&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 15&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;16&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2nd Voice&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 16&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;A mixer strip.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[File:Fig65.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle8.jpg | 640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle8a.jpg | 640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==  SECTION SOUND EDIT ==&lt;br /&gt;
Double-click on one of the 16 tracks to open the SOUND EDIT window. Once the window is open, a single click on any other track will change the the SOUND EDIT window to that track. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig66.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4, 2nd VOICE, LEFT 1, 2, 3 tracks allows to create simple or more complex presets, and the following parameters are added: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;A keyboard play area:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;Key From&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Key To&#039;&#039;&#039; allow you to select the range of keys(notes) for an action.&lt;br /&gt;
::: Define the &#039;&#039;&#039;Key From&#039;&#039;&#039; note by clicking on the displayed value and then play the keyboard the desired note (the number will be displayed.). &lt;br /&gt;
::: Define the &#039;&#039;&#039;Key To&#039;&#039;&#039; note by clicking on the displayed value and then play the keyboard the desired note (which may not be less than &#039;&#039;&#039;From Key&#039;&#039;&#039;). &lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;A velocity range:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;Velocity From&#039;&#039;&#039; Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will be generated. A low value corresponds to &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; the maximum is &amp;quot;Sforzando.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;Velocity To&#039;&#039;&#039; Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will no longer generated. This value can not be less than Velocity From. &lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;An octave change.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;A transposition in semitones.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These special lanes and 2nd RIGHT and LEFT VOICE allow for example to produce a different tone and a different velocity according to the octave played&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig67.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once these parameters are set, you can save the preset using &#039;&#039;&#039;SAVE SOUND&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Additional for the &#039;&#039;&#039;DRUM&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;PERC&#039;&#039;&#039; tracks only&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::Right-click on the DRUM or PERC track and select &#039;&#039;&#039;DRUM MIXER...&#039;&#039;&#039; to access the additional extra settings for the percussion tracks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig68.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Particularity of the &#039;&#039;&#039;BASS&#039;&#039;&#039; track&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You have the ability to save the MANUAL BASS SUSTAIN. To do this, select Manual Bass, double click on the bass track, and change the value of the Release Time. You can then save this setting in SAVE STARTUP CONFIG.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SAVE SOUND ==&lt;br /&gt;
SAVE RIGHT SOUND is available from the button [[File:Fig68a.jpg | 120px]]&lt;br /&gt;
and &amp;quot;SOUND ...&amp;quot; The following parameters are stored in SAVE RIGHT SOUND: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle9.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By combining up to 5 tracks (RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4 and 2nd VOICE) it is easy to create new complex sounds. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== CONTEXT MENU TRACK ==&lt;br /&gt;
Right click on a track displays a context menu that allows the following selections: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, right click ACCOMP4:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig69.jpg | 360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===  SEND TO MIDI ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  menu  allows  you  to  route  MIDI  track  this  information  to  multiple  MIDI  outputs,  these &lt;br /&gt;
choices are not mutually exclusive. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : It is possible to use multiple MIDI interfaces with the same names of MIDI ports.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SOUND EDIT ...  ===&lt;br /&gt;
See Section 5.10.2 SOUND EDIT &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DRUM MIXER ...  ===&lt;br /&gt;
See Section xxx DRUM MIXER &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== STYLE MIXER ... ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  command  displays  summary  screen  settings  current  style  for  each  track,  and  each &lt;br /&gt;
variation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig70.jpg |780| center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== GROUP MASTER/EFFECTS ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig71.jpg |240| center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This group has 4 channels and adjustment effects two groups: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The first track named &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG, we read a sequence or an audio file, or STYLE &#039;&#039;&#039; for the use of a &lt;br /&gt;
style rule by moving the cursor vertical level of the sequence, or the audio file type (0-127) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The second channel named [[File:Fig71b.jpg | 40px ]] adjusted by means of the vertical level of the cursor LEFT section (0 to 127). This path can be selected, which causes the display option [[File:Fig71c.jpg | 90px ]] in VOICE. This feature allows you to associate a bar SOUNDS MY STYLE. A right-click displays &lt;br /&gt;
the popup menu cf. 5.10.4. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  third  path  named in [[File:Fig71d.jpg | 50px ]] adjusted  by  means  of  the  vertical  level  of  the  cursor  RIGHT section (0 to 127). This path can be selected, which causes the column display stamps allowing choice. A right-click displays the popup menu cf. 5.10.4. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth track named  MAST rule acting on the vertical [[File:Fig71e.jpg | 50px ]] rule acting on the vertical slider overall output  level (MASTER) from 0 to 127.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Above, another digital indicator shows white numerals on a black background, it is of polyphony, &lt;br /&gt;
in other words, the number of notes &amp;quot;ON&amp;quot; sent to the sound module. This allows for example, &lt;br /&gt;
whether &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; is receiving MIDI data from the device connected to MIDI IN. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  first  group  of  effects  named  FX1-REVERB  can  select  a  reverb  type  from  eight  types  of &lt;br /&gt;
which OFF (no reverb). The choice is made by clicking on the name of the REVERB in use, a &lt;br /&gt;
drop-down list displays the different reverbs available. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By  clicking  on  the  bottom  of  the  window &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It  clears  the  combo  box  without  applying  the &lt;br /&gt;
changes. &lt;br /&gt;
The maximum level is adjustable reverb chosen in another drop-down list of values: 0 to 16. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The second effect group named FX2 can choose different types of CHORUS DELAY DISTO to &lt;br /&gt;
be applied to different tracks &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Eight different types are available including an  OFF for all &lt;br /&gt;
three FX2 effects. By clicking on the bottom of thewindow &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It clears the combo box without &lt;br /&gt;
applying the changes. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.10._MIXER&amp;diff=551</id>
		<title>5.10. MIXER</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.10._MIXER&amp;diff=551"/>
		<updated>2016-02-17T15:47:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* SECTION SOUND EDIT */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== THE MIXER PANEL ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The mixer group has 16 &#039;strips&#039;, one for each &#039;track&#039; as in the image below. Each track represents one of the 16 midi channels of the multitimbral midi synthesizer.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt; Each track can be one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;An arranger track&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;A midifile track&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;A left hand track&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;A right hand track &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI channel numbering can be confusing. MIDI Channels are named 1 to 16, but they are represented by physical numbers that are one less than that, i.e., 0 to 15. The numbers shown below are the &#039;&#039;physical&#039;&#039; number. To get the MIDI logical channel number,  Please add +1 to all &amp;quot;Channel MIDI&amp;quot; in left column&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Generally you can check this by looking at the number for the drums channel, which by convention is normally MIDI logical channel 10.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;As and example: RIGHT1 below is MIDI Channel 13&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Please not also that the mixer strips in arranger mode are ordered as in the centre column below. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;For MIDI and Karaoke files, the channels to which the sounds are sent, and that the strips control, are in the right-most column below.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle7.jpg | 480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The following may be clearer &#039;&#039;&#039;if I have it correctly&#039;&#039;&#039;. All MIDI/Track numbers below are MIDI channel names 1 to 16, rather than the physical coding 0 to 15&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td colspan=4 align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Try a table version&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Strip&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Arranger&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;MID/KAR Play&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Number&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track Name&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;MIDI channel&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;MIDI Channel&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Drums&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;10&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Percussion&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;9&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Bass&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;4&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Accomp 1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 4&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Accomp 2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;7&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 5&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Accomp 3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;8&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 6&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;7&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Accomp 4&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;11&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 7&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;8&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Accomp 5&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;12&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 8&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;9&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Left 1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 9&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;10&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Left 2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;4&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Drums 10&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;11&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Left 3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 11&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;12&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Right 1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;13&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 12&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;13&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Right 2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;14&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 13&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;14&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Right 3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;15&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 14&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;15&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Right 4&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;16&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 15&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;16&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2nd Voice&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 16&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;A mixer strip.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[File:Fig65.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle8.jpg | 640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle8a.jpg | 640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==  SECTION SOUND EDIT ==&lt;br /&gt;
Double-click on one of the 16 tracks to open the SOUND EDIT window. Once the window is open, a single click on other tracks will change the the SOUND EDIT window to that other track. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig66.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4, 2nd VOICE, LEFT 1, 2, 3 tracks allows to create simple or more complex presets, and the following parameters are added: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;A keyboard play area:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;Key From&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Key To&#039;&#039;&#039; allow you to select the range of keys(notes) for an action.&lt;br /&gt;
::: Define the &#039;&#039;&#039;Key From&#039;&#039;&#039; note by clicking on the displayed value and then play the keyboard the desired note (the number will be displayed.). &lt;br /&gt;
::: Define the &#039;&#039;&#039;Key To&#039;&#039;&#039; note by clicking on the displayed value and then play the keyboard the desired note (which may not be less than &#039;&#039;&#039;From Key&#039;&#039;&#039;). &lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;A velocity range:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;Velocity From&#039;&#039;&#039; Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will be generated. A low value corresponds to &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; the maximum is &amp;quot;Sforzando.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;Velocity To&#039;&#039;&#039; Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will no longer generated. This value can not be less than Velocity From. &lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;An octave change.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;A transposition in semitones.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These special lanes and 2nd RIGHT and LEFT VOICE allow for example to produce a different tone and a different velocity according to the octave played&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig67.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once these parameters are set, you can save the preset using &#039;&#039;&#039;SAVE SOUND&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Additional for the &#039;&#039;&#039;DRUM&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;PERC&#039;&#039;&#039; tracks only&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::Right-click on the DRUM or PERC track and select &#039;&#039;&#039;DRUM MIXER...&#039;&#039;&#039; to access the additional extra settings for the percussion tracks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig68.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Particularity of the &#039;&#039;&#039;BASS&#039;&#039;&#039; track&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You have the ability to save the MANUAL BASS SUSTAIN. To do this, select Manual Bass, double click on the bass track, and change the value of the Release Time. You can then save this setting in SAVE STARTUP CONFIG.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SAVE SOUND ==&lt;br /&gt;
SAVE RIGHT SOUND is available from the button [[File:Fig68a.jpg | 120px]]&lt;br /&gt;
and &amp;quot;SOUND ...&amp;quot; The following parameters are stored in SAVE RIGHT SOUND: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle9.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By combining up to 5 tracks (RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4 and 2nd VOICE) it is easy to create new complex sounds. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== CONTEXT MENU TRACK ==&lt;br /&gt;
Right click on a track displays a context menu that allows the following selections: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, right click ACCOMP4:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig69.jpg | 360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===  SEND TO MIDI ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  menu  allows  you  to  route  MIDI  track  this  information  to  multiple  MIDI  outputs,  these &lt;br /&gt;
choices are not mutually exclusive. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : It is possible to use multiple MIDI interfaces with the same names of MIDI ports.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SOUND EDIT ...  ===&lt;br /&gt;
See Section 5.10.2 SOUND EDIT &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DRUM MIXER ...  ===&lt;br /&gt;
See Section xxx DRUM MIXER &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== STYLE MIXER ... ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  command  displays  summary  screen  settings  current  style  for  each  track,  and  each &lt;br /&gt;
variation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig70.jpg |780| center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== GROUP MASTER/EFFECTS ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig71.jpg |240| center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This group has 4 channels and adjustment effects two groups: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The first track named &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG, we read a sequence or an audio file, or STYLE &#039;&#039;&#039; for the use of a &lt;br /&gt;
style rule by moving the cursor vertical level of the sequence, or the audio file type (0-127) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The second channel named [[File:Fig71b.jpg | 40px ]] adjusted by means of the vertical level of the cursor LEFT section (0 to 127). This path can be selected, which causes the display option [[File:Fig71c.jpg | 90px ]] in VOICE. This feature allows you to associate a bar SOUNDS MY STYLE. A right-click displays &lt;br /&gt;
the popup menu cf. 5.10.4. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  third  path  named in [[File:Fig71d.jpg | 50px ]] adjusted  by  means  of  the  vertical  level  of  the  cursor  RIGHT section (0 to 127). This path can be selected, which causes the column display stamps allowing choice. A right-click displays the popup menu cf. 5.10.4. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth track named  MAST rule acting on the vertical [[File:Fig71e.jpg | 50px ]] rule acting on the vertical slider overall output  level (MASTER) from 0 to 127.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Above, another digital indicator shows white numerals on a black background, it is of polyphony, &lt;br /&gt;
in other words, the number of notes &amp;quot;ON&amp;quot; sent to the sound module. This allows for example, &lt;br /&gt;
whether &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; is receiving MIDI data from the device connected to MIDI IN. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  first  group  of  effects  named  FX1-REVERB  can  select  a  reverb  type  from  eight  types  of &lt;br /&gt;
which OFF (no reverb). The choice is made by clicking on the name of the REVERB in use, a &lt;br /&gt;
drop-down list displays the different reverbs available. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By  clicking  on  the  bottom  of  the  window &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It  clears  the  combo  box  without  applying  the &lt;br /&gt;
changes. &lt;br /&gt;
The maximum level is adjustable reverb chosen in another drop-down list of values: 0 to 16. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The second effect group named FX2 can choose different types of CHORUS DELAY DISTO to &lt;br /&gt;
be applied to different tracks &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Eight different types are available including an  OFF for all &lt;br /&gt;
three FX2 effects. By clicking on the bottom of thewindow &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It clears the combo box without &lt;br /&gt;
applying the changes. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.10._MIXER&amp;diff=550</id>
		<title>5.10. MIXER</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.10._MIXER&amp;diff=550"/>
		<updated>2016-02-17T15:45:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* THE MIXER PANEL */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== THE MIXER PANEL ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The mixer group has 16 &#039;strips&#039;, one for each &#039;track&#039; as in the image below. Each track represents one of the 16 midi channels of the multitimbral midi synthesizer.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt; Each track can be one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;An arranger track&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;A midifile track&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;A left hand track&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;A right hand track &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI channel numbering can be confusing. MIDI Channels are named 1 to 16, but they are represented by physical numbers that are one less than that, i.e., 0 to 15. The numbers shown below are the &#039;&#039;physical&#039;&#039; number. To get the MIDI logical channel number,  Please add +1 to all &amp;quot;Channel MIDI&amp;quot; in left column&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Generally you can check this by looking at the number for the drums channel, which by convention is normally MIDI logical channel 10.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;As and example: RIGHT1 below is MIDI Channel 13&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Please not also that the mixer strips in arranger mode are ordered as in the centre column below. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;For MIDI and Karaoke files, the channels to which the sounds are sent, and that the strips control, are in the right-most column below.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle7.jpg | 480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The following may be clearer &#039;&#039;&#039;if I have it correctly&#039;&#039;&#039;. All MIDI/Track numbers below are MIDI channel names 1 to 16, rather than the physical coding 0 to 15&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td colspan=4 align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Try a table version&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Strip&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Arranger&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;MID/KAR Play&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Number&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track Name&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;MIDI channel&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;MIDI Channel&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Drums&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;10&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Percussion&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;9&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Bass&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;4&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Accomp 1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 4&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Accomp 2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;7&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 5&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Accomp 3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;8&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 6&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;7&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Accomp 4&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;11&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 7&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;8&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Accomp 5&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;12&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 8&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;9&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Left 1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 9&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;10&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Left 2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;4&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Drums 10&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;11&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Left 3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 11&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;12&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Right 1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;13&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 12&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;13&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Right 2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;14&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 13&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;14&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Right 3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;15&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 14&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;15&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Right 4&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;16&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 15&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;16&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2nd Voice&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 16&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;A mixer strip.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[File:Fig65.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle8.jpg | 640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle8a.jpg | 640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==  SECTION SOUND EDIT ==&lt;br /&gt;
Double-click on one of the 16 tracks opens the SOUND EDIT window. Once the window is open, a single click on other tracks, update the SOUND EDIT window. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig66.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4, 2nd VOICE, LEFT 1, 2, 3 tracks allows to create simple or more complex presets, and the following parameters are added: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;A keyboard play area:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;Key From&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Key To&#039;&#039;&#039; allow you to select the range of keys(notes) for an action.&lt;br /&gt;
::: Define the &#039;&#039;&#039;Key From&#039;&#039;&#039; note by clicking on the displayed value and then play the keyboard the desired note (the number will be displayed.). &lt;br /&gt;
::: Define the &#039;&#039;&#039;Key To&#039;&#039;&#039; note by clicking on the displayed value and then play the keyboard the desired note (which may not be less than &#039;&#039;&#039;From Key&#039;&#039;&#039;). &lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;A velocity range:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;Velocity From&#039;&#039;&#039; Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will be generated. A low value corresponds to &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; the maximum is &amp;quot;Sforzando.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;Velocity To&#039;&#039;&#039; Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will no longer generated. This value can not be less than Velocity From. &lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;An octave change.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;A transposition in semitones.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These special lanes and 2nd RIGHT and LEFT VOICE allow for example to produce a different tone and a different velocity according to the octave played&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig67.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once these parameters are set, you can save the preset using &#039;&#039;&#039;SAVE SOUND&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Additional for the &#039;&#039;&#039;DRUM&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;PERC&#039;&#039;&#039; tracks only&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::Right-click on the DRUM or PERC track and select &#039;&#039;&#039;DRUM MIXER...&#039;&#039;&#039; to access the additional extra settings for the percussion tracks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig68.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Particularity of the &#039;&#039;&#039;BASS&#039;&#039;&#039; track&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You have the ability to save the MANUAL BASS SUSTAIN. To do this, select Manual Bass, double click on the bass track, and change the value of the Release Time. You can then save this setting in SAVE STARTUP CONFIG.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SAVE SOUND ==&lt;br /&gt;
SAVE RIGHT SOUND is available from the button [[File:Fig68a.jpg | 120px]]&lt;br /&gt;
and &amp;quot;SOUND ...&amp;quot; The following parameters are stored in SAVE RIGHT SOUND: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle9.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By combining up to 5 tracks (RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4 and 2nd VOICE) it is easy to create new complex sounds. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== CONTEXT MENU TRACK ==&lt;br /&gt;
Right click on a track displays a context menu that allows the following selections: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, right click ACCOMP4:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig69.jpg | 360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===  SEND TO MIDI ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  menu  allows  you  to  route  MIDI  track  this  information  to  multiple  MIDI  outputs,  these &lt;br /&gt;
choices are not mutually exclusive. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : It is possible to use multiple MIDI interfaces with the same names of MIDI ports.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SOUND EDIT ...  ===&lt;br /&gt;
See Section 5.10.2 SOUND EDIT &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DRUM MIXER ...  ===&lt;br /&gt;
See Section xxx DRUM MIXER &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== STYLE MIXER ... ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  command  displays  summary  screen  settings  current  style  for  each  track,  and  each &lt;br /&gt;
variation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig70.jpg |780| center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== GROUP MASTER/EFFECTS ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig71.jpg |240| center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This group has 4 channels and adjustment effects two groups: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The first track named &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG, we read a sequence or an audio file, or STYLE &#039;&#039;&#039; for the use of a &lt;br /&gt;
style rule by moving the cursor vertical level of the sequence, or the audio file type (0-127) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The second channel named [[File:Fig71b.jpg | 40px ]] adjusted by means of the vertical level of the cursor LEFT section (0 to 127). This path can be selected, which causes the display option [[File:Fig71c.jpg | 90px ]] in VOICE. This feature allows you to associate a bar SOUNDS MY STYLE. A right-click displays &lt;br /&gt;
the popup menu cf. 5.10.4. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  third  path  named in [[File:Fig71d.jpg | 50px ]] adjusted  by  means  of  the  vertical  level  of  the  cursor  RIGHT section (0 to 127). This path can be selected, which causes the column display stamps allowing choice. A right-click displays the popup menu cf. 5.10.4. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth track named  MAST rule acting on the vertical [[File:Fig71e.jpg | 50px ]] rule acting on the vertical slider overall output  level (MASTER) from 0 to 127.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Above, another digital indicator shows white numerals on a black background, it is of polyphony, &lt;br /&gt;
in other words, the number of notes &amp;quot;ON&amp;quot; sent to the sound module. This allows for example, &lt;br /&gt;
whether &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; is receiving MIDI data from the device connected to MIDI IN. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  first  group  of  effects  named  FX1-REVERB  can  select  a  reverb  type  from  eight  types  of &lt;br /&gt;
which OFF (no reverb). The choice is made by clicking on the name of the REVERB in use, a &lt;br /&gt;
drop-down list displays the different reverbs available. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By  clicking  on  the  bottom  of  the  window &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It  clears  the  combo  box  without  applying  the &lt;br /&gt;
changes. &lt;br /&gt;
The maximum level is adjustable reverb chosen in another drop-down list of values: 0 to 16. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The second effect group named FX2 can choose different types of CHORUS DELAY DISTO to &lt;br /&gt;
be applied to different tracks &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Eight different types are available including an  OFF for all &lt;br /&gt;
three FX2 effects. By clicking on the bottom of thewindow &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It clears the combo box without &lt;br /&gt;
applying the changes. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.8._MY_SOUNDS&amp;diff=549</id>
		<title>5.8. MY SOUNDS</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.8._MY_SOUNDS&amp;diff=549"/>
		<updated>2016-02-15T17:33:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* VOICE MENUES */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== VOICE MENUS ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig46.jpg | 640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;This frame contains two lines, each of 10 Buttons, and will be called MY SOUNDS bars. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The top bar for RIGHT or right hand accordionists can contain up to 10 Buttons chosen from the library VOICE Buttons, these Buttons are directly accessible at any time during play for the lower LEFT or left hand bar ( agreements) for accordion has the same characteristics.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;BY  STYLE  with  activated  (bar  VOICE)  10 Buttons  and  10 Buttons  UPPER  LOWER  can  be associated with each STYLE to be immediately available.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt; &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : See also paragraph GROUP MASTER / EFFECTS&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;To change the order in which the Buttons are displayed in the MY SOUNDS bar, simply drag the required Button  to a new location in the bar. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;This frame also contains a &#039;&#039;&#039;LINK&#039;&#039;&#039; Button that takes the colour RED when the feature is enabled or grey otherwise.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[File:Fig47.jpg | 640px | center]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;This  great  feature  allows  you  automatically to change  the  timbre  of  the  LEFT  and  RIGHT section depending on the variation in play. The Buttons will be the first four bars MY SOUNDS. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== &amp;quot;Sounds Drop Here&amp;quot; ===&lt;br /&gt;
To add to MY SOUNDS, simply drag Button(s) selected from the frame into MY SOUNDS.  You may also load a Button in MY SOUNDS, by right-clicking the Button and then click ADD TO MY SOUNDS. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig49.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Delete a Button from MY SOUNDS ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;To remove a Button from MY SOUNDS, right-click the Button and a menu then shows REMOVE. The Button will only be removed from MY SOUNDS. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig49a.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note:&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; that there is no confirmation box.  The sound is just removed immediately.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.7._VOICE&amp;diff=548</id>
		<title>5.7. VOICE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.7._VOICE&amp;diff=548"/>
		<updated>2016-02-15T17:18:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* INS */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== VOICE MENUS ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig41.jpg | 560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The VOICE frame has 20 banks in which timbres are classified sound classes:&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[File:Fig41a.jpg | 360px | center]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Multitimbral voices consists of two timbres to be played simultaneously on the same note&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;monotimbrale voices consist of a single timbre.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Each bank contains VOICE stamps sorted by ten pages in a vertical column on the right. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Use the arrows [[File:Fig41b.jpg | 90px]] to navigate through the various pages of the library (here, page 2 of 6).&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;In the narrow bar between the two arrows, when  the  cursor  changes  shape,  a mouse click will  make  the  column disappear.  The column will reappear when you select a bank.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Right-click on the label of a timbre to display a context menu similar to the following: [[File:Fig41c.jpg | 150px]]  that offers the choices to add the stamp in MY SOUNDS or remove only for VOICE USER  (yellow  label).  Removal  requires a confirmation (&amp;quot;Are  you  sure  you  want  to permanently delete the selected sound?&amp;quot;) .&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[File:Fig42.jpg | 360px | center]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The bank DRAWBARS contains timbres for a drawbar organ, the selection of one of them revealed a new window in which the settings are displayed for the selected Preset. A button SLOW / FAST can  choose  fast  or  slow  the  speed  LESLIE  effect.  You  can  assign  this  button  OPTION  / CONTROLLERS.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig42a.jpg | 360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;You may  change  these  settings  by  moving  the  drawbars  and  add  percussion  on  two harmonics up. The result can then be saved as a USER VOICE by SAVE and SOUND (see 5.10.3 procedure ).&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The OFF function individually mutes timbres, forming a multi-timbral sound. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig43.jpg | 360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== INS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;INS function INSTRUMENT, at the right-hand end of the VOICE frame, also makes it is easy to select sounds from any MIDI synthesizer.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; displays the list of sounds on your module.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;  is  compatible  with  the  file  format  .INS  (Cakewalk  Instrument  Definition).  Many  of  these &lt;br /&gt;
.INS files are available on the Internet and soon in the download section of our forum.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;To activate the INS function, click on LOAD and select an INS file.&lt;br /&gt;
 This will import the sound bank in &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; And displays a new window with a list of sounds.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt; It is important to note that the *.Ins files must be present on the hard drive of the computer. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig44.jpg | 560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Column &#039;&#039;&#039;ALTERNATIVES shows alternative sounds from all banks. This is useful if the sounds of other banks are classified according to the GM standard.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
To find this window at any time an INS button is added (top right groups of sounds: PIANO, E.PIANO ...) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig45.jpg | 180px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Right click on the button displays the INS INS files folder on the computer disk. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;To change the sound, click on one of the 16 tracks,then click the button INS. The new screen allows you to navigate through all the files installed INS, synths, banks and select one of the 128  sounds  of  the  displayed  bank.  Once  the  INS  window  open,  you  can  also  click  on  other tracks, to change the sounds.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.7._VOICE&amp;diff=547</id>
		<title>5.7. VOICE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.7._VOICE&amp;diff=547"/>
		<updated>2016-02-15T17:07:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* VOICE MENUS */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== VOICE MENUS ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig41.jpg | 560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The VOICE frame has 20 banks in which timbres are classified sound classes:&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[File:Fig41a.jpg | 360px | center]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Multitimbral voices consists of two timbres to be played simultaneously on the same note&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;monotimbrale voices consist of a single timbre.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Each bank contains VOICE stamps sorted by ten pages in a vertical column on the right. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Use the arrows [[File:Fig41b.jpg | 90px]] to navigate through the various pages of the library (here, page 2 of 6).&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;In the narrow bar between the two arrows, when  the  cursor  changes  shape,  a mouse click will  make  the  column disappear.  The column will reappear when you select a bank.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Right-click on the label of a timbre to display a context menu similar to the following: [[File:Fig41c.jpg | 150px]]  that offers the choices to add the stamp in MY SOUNDS or remove only for VOICE USER  (yellow  label).  Removal  requires a confirmation (&amp;quot;Are  you  sure  you  want  to permanently delete the selected sound?&amp;quot;) .&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[File:Fig42.jpg | 360px | center]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The bank DRAWBARS contains timbres for a drawbar organ, the selection of one of them revealed a new window in which the settings are displayed for the selected Preset. A button SLOW / FAST can  choose  fast  or  slow  the  speed  LESLIE  effect.  You  can  assign  this  button  OPTION  / CONTROLLERS.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig42a.jpg | 360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;You may  change  these  settings  by  moving  the  drawbars  and  add  percussion  on  two harmonics up. The result can then be saved as a USER VOICE by SAVE and SOUND (see 5.10.3 procedure ).&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The OFF function individually mutes timbres, forming a multi-timbral sound. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig43.jpg | 360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== INS ==&lt;br /&gt;
INS function INSTRUMENT: Ketron SD2 In addition, itis also easy to select sounds from any MIDI synthesizer.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; display the list of sounds on your module.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;  is  compatible  with  the  file  format.  INS  (Cakewalk  Instrument  Definition).  Many  of  these &lt;br /&gt;
files. INS are available on the Internet and soon in the download section of our forum. &lt;br /&gt;
To activate the INS function, click on LOAD and select an INS file. This will import the sound bank in &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; And displays a new window with a list of sounds. It is important to note that the *. Ins must be present on the hard drive of the computer. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig44.jpg | 560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Column &#039;&#039;&#039;ALTERNATIVES shows alternative sounds from all banks. This is useful if the sounds of other banks are classified according to the GM standard.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
To find this window at any time an INS button is added (top right groups of sounds: PIANO, E.PIANO ...) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig45.jpg | 180px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Right click on the button displays the INS INS files folder on the computer disk. &lt;br /&gt;
To change the sound, click on one of the 16 tracks,then click the button INS. The new screen allows you to navigate through all the files installed INS, synths, banks and select one of the 128  sounds  of  the  displayed  bank.  Once  the  INS  window  open,  you  can  also  click  on  other tracks, to change the sounds.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.7._VOICE&amp;diff=546</id>
		<title>5.7. VOICE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.7._VOICE&amp;diff=546"/>
		<updated>2016-02-15T17:04:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* VOICE MENUES */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== VOICE MENUS ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig41.jpg | 560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The VOICE frame has 20 banks in which timbres are classified sound classes:&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig41a.jpg | 360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Multitimbral voices consists of two timbres to be played simultaneously on the same note&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;monotimbrale voices consist of a single timbre.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Each bank contains VOICE stamps sorted by ten pages in a vertical column on the right. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the arrows [[File:Fig41b.jpg | 90px]] to navigate through the various pages of the library (here, page 2 of 6).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;In the narrow bar between the two arrows, when  the  cursor  changes  shape,  a mouse click will  make  the  column disappear.  The column will reappear when you select a bank.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Right-click on the label of a timbre to display a context menu similar to the following: [[File:Fig41c.jpg | 150px]]  that offers the choices to add the stamp in MY SOUNDS or remove only for VOICE USER  (yellow  label).  Removal  requires a confirmation (&amp;quot;Are  you  sure  you  want  to permanently delete the selected sound?&amp;quot;) .&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig42.jpg | 360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The bank DRAWBARS contains timbres for a drawbar organ, the selection of one of them revealed a new window in which the settings are displayed for the selected Preset. A button SLOW / FAST can  choose  fast  or  slow  the  speed  LESLIE  effect.  You  can  assign  this  button  OPTION  / CONTROLLERS.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig42a.jpg | 360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;You may  change  these  settings  by  moving  the  drawbars  and  add  percussion  on  two harmonics up. The result can then be saved as a USER VOICE by SAVE and SOUND (see 5.10.3 procedure ).&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The OFF function individually mutes timbres, forming a multi-timbral sound. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig43.jpg | 360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== INS ==&lt;br /&gt;
INS function INSTRUMENT: Ketron SD2 In addition, itis also easy to select sounds from any MIDI synthesizer.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; display the list of sounds on your module.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;  is  compatible  with  the  file  format.  INS  (Cakewalk  Instrument  Definition).  Many  of  these &lt;br /&gt;
files. INS are available on the Internet and soon in the download section of our forum. &lt;br /&gt;
To activate the INS function, click on LOAD and select an INS file. This will import the sound bank in &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; And displays a new window with a list of sounds. It is important to note that the *. Ins must be present on the hard drive of the computer. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig44.jpg | 560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Column &#039;&#039;&#039;ALTERNATIVES shows alternative sounds from all banks. This is useful if the sounds of other banks are classified according to the GM standard.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
To find this window at any time an INS button is added (top right groups of sounds: PIANO, E.PIANO ...) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig45.jpg | 180px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Right click on the button displays the INS INS files folder on the computer disk. &lt;br /&gt;
To change the sound, click on one of the 16 tracks,then click the button INS. The new screen allows you to navigate through all the files installed INS, synths, banks and select one of the 128  sounds  of  the  displayed  bank.  Once  the  INS  window  open,  you  can  also  click  on  other tracks, to change the sounds.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.6._RIGHT&amp;diff=545</id>
		<title>5.6. RIGHT</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.6._RIGHT&amp;diff=545"/>
		<updated>2016-02-15T16:37:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* RIGHT */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== RIGHT ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig38.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
With no  option  selected,  playing a note on the  right  hand  produces a  single  tone  and  the  left  hand will  be active until the split point (does not apply to the Accordion mode). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== RIGHT - 2ND VOICE ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig39.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows us to overlay a second instrument/timbre set of the right hand and adjust its characteristics. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== RIGHT FULL KEYBOARD ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig40.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;In this mode, the chord recognition occurs over the entire keyboard. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Although  this  feature  RIGHT  FULL  KEYBOARD indicates  mainly that the  right  side  of  the  keyboard  has  a particular effect, with MIDI accordions in association with MANUAL BASS operates as follows: &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle3.jpg | 640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle4.jpg | 640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Please Note&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; that in this image, the word &#039;&#039;&#039;battery&#039;&#039;&#039; is a failed translation of &#039;&#039;batterie&#039;&#039; ... &#039;&#039;&#039;the drums&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.3._REALTIME_DISPLAY&amp;diff=544</id>
		<title>5.3. REALTIME DISPLAY</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.3._REALTIME_DISPLAY&amp;diff=544"/>
		<updated>2016-02-15T16:25:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* FRAME L */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== MAIN DISPLAY ==&lt;br /&gt;
This real-time display consists of two frames (Left and Right):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Frame L&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Frame R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Player A&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Player B&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;  the  active  part  is  the  one  whose  letter  is outlined in white (here subframe A is active).&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig30.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FRAME L ==&lt;br /&gt;
Frame L shows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dt&amp;gt; In the first line&amp;lt;/dt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt; (By Style), or the instrument or timbre on the left hand (accordion) or  on the left  of  the  split  point   for  pianists  (SYNSTRGS1  in  the  example).  Select the left or right channel volume comtrols, bottom right near the master volume control, to change the instrument or timble&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dt&amp;gt; In the second line&amp;lt;/dt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt; instrument group from which the instrument or timbre was selected (STRINGS in the example). (Hmmm, not sure &amp;quot;instrument group&amp;quot; is correct .. GS)&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dt&amp;gt; In the third line&amp;lt;/dt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt; the MIDI configuration ACCORDION (Figure 25) or Split (piano/organ keyboard) (Figure 26). &amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[File:Fig31.jpg |560px | center]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dt&amp;gt;In Keyboard Mode&amp;lt;/dt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Split&#039;&#039;&#039; indicates the note where the left/right split is made. By clicking Split you may adjust the split point.&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dt&amp;gt;In Accordion Mode&amp;lt;/dt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;The left and right hands are physically separated, so the Split indicator does not appear.&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dt&amp;gt;In Organ Mode:&amp;lt;/dt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt; VA2 recognizes chords for accompaniment only left from the Split point! From the Split point to the right end of the keys you can play melody!&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The dashes after [ACCORDION] or [C3]  indicates the agreement recognized and played by the arranger (U.S. encryption) when it is in operation.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The &#039;&#039;&#039;Mode&#039;&#039;&#039; is selected from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039; button &#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI PORTS...&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FRAME R ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Frame R shows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dt&amp;gt;In the first line&amp;lt;/dt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt; selected instrument or timbre for the right hand of an accordion or the  right  side of  the  split  point  for  piano and organ  (ROCK  PIANO  in the example above).&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dt&amp;gt;In the  second  line&amp;lt;/dt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt; the group stamp RIGHT voice (PIANO in the example)&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dt&amp;gt;In the third line&amp;lt;/dt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt; the tone of the second voice (VIOLA in the example).&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PLAYER A ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;In this area, you can load the styles of different formats (Ketron, YAMAHA and ROLAND), MIDI Sequences (*. Mid), the KARAOKE files (*. Kar). &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Hover the cursor  on  the  name  of  the  SONG  and the parent STYLE is  displayed  in  a  yellow  name  tag, for example:&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig33.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PLAYER B ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;In this area, you can load audio files (*. Mp3, *. Wav, *. Wma). &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The active player has his letter surrounded by a white rectangle.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Also be aware that the play function of Player B can only be operated from an external controller, such as your midi keyboard or Korg NanoKontrol2 or similar.&lt;br /&gt;
Controls can be &amp;lt;Start/Stop&amp;gt; &amp;lt;Crossfader&amp;gt; between Player A and Player B&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.3._REALTIME_DISPLAY&amp;diff=543</id>
		<title>5.3. REALTIME DISPLAY</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.3._REALTIME_DISPLAY&amp;diff=543"/>
		<updated>2016-02-15T16:21:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: Mostly just adjusting the English translation and the layout.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== MAIN DISPLAY ==&lt;br /&gt;
This real-time display consists of two frames (Left and Right):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Frame L&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Frame R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Player A&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Player B&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;  the  active  part  is  the  one  whose  letter  is outlined in white (here subframe A is active).&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig30.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FRAME L ==&lt;br /&gt;
Frame L shows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dt&amp;gt; In the first line&amp;lt;/dt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt; (By Style), or the instrument or timbre on the left hand (accordion) or  on the left  of  the  split  point   for  pianists  (SYNSTRGS1  in  the  example).  Select the left or right channel volume comtrols, bottom right near the master volume control, to change the instrument or timble&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dt&amp;gt; In the second line&amp;lt;/dt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt; instrument group from which the instrument or timbre was selected (STRINGS in the example). (Hmmm, not sure that&#039;s correct .. GS)&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dt&amp;gt; In the third line&amp;lt;/dt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt; the MIDI configuration ACCORDION (Figure 25) or Split (piano/organ keyboard) (Figure 26). &amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[File:Fig31.jpg |560px | center]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dt&amp;gt;In Keyboard Mode&amp;lt;/dt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Split&#039;&#039;&#039; indicates the note where the left/right split is made. By clicking Split you may adjust the split point.&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dt&amp;gt;In Accordion Mode&amp;lt;/dt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;The left and right hands are physically separated, so the Split indicator does not appear.&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dt&amp;gt;In Organ Mode:&amp;lt;/dt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt; VA2 recognizes chords for accompaniment only left from the Split point! From the Split point to the right end of the keys you can play melody!&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The dashes after [ACCORDION] or [C3]  indicates the agreement recognized and played by the arranger (U.S. encryption) when it is in operation.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The &#039;&#039;&#039;Mode&#039;&#039;&#039; is selected from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039; button &#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI PORTS...&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FRAME R ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Frame R shows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dt&amp;gt;In the first line&amp;lt;/dt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt; selected instrument or timbre for the right hand of an accordion or the  right  side of  the  split  point  for  piano and organ  (ROCK  PIANO  in the example above).&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dt&amp;gt;In the  second  line&amp;lt;/dt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt; the group stamp RIGHT voice (PIANO in the example)&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dt&amp;gt;In the third line&amp;lt;/dt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt; the tone of the second voice (VIOLA in the example).&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PLAYER A ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;In this area, you can load the styles of different formats (Ketron, YAMAHA and ROLAND), MIDI Sequences (*. Mid), the KARAOKE files (*. Kar). &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Hover the cursor  on  the  name  of  the  SONG  and the parent STYLE is  displayed  in  a  yellow  name  tag, for example:&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig33.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PLAYER B ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;In this area, you can load audio files (*. Mp3, *. Wav, *. Wma). &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The active player has his letter surrounded by a white rectangle.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Also be aware that the play function of Player B can only be operated from an external controller, such as your midi keyboard or Korg NanoKontrol2 or similar.&lt;br /&gt;
Controls can be &amp;lt;Start/Stop&amp;gt; &amp;lt;Crossfader&amp;gt; between Player A and Player B&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.3._REALTIME_DISPLAY&amp;diff=542</id>
		<title>5.3. REALTIME DISPLAY</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.3._REALTIME_DISPLAY&amp;diff=542"/>
		<updated>2016-02-14T18:30:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: I have reworded a few bute here, but I am not certain of the accuracy, specifically regarding &amp;quot;instrument or timbre&amp;quot;.  I&amp;#039;ve mislaid my &amp;#039;dongle&amp;#039;, so chan&amp;#039;t check at the moment.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== MAIN DISPLAY ==&lt;br /&gt;
This real-time display consists of two frames (Left and Right):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Frame L&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Frame R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Player A&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Player B&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;  the  active  part  is  the  one  whose  letter  is outlined in white (here subframe A is active).&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig30.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FRAME L ==&lt;br /&gt;
Frame L shows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; In the first line, the instrument or timbre on the left hand (accordion) or  on the left  of  the  split  point   for  pianists  (SYNSTRGS1  in  the  example).&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; In the second line, instrument group from which the instrument or timbre was selected (STRINGS in the example). &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; In the third line, the MIDI configuration ACCORDION (Figure 25) or PIANIST (KEYBOARD) (Figure 26). &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[File:Fig31.jpg |560px | center]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;In KEYBOARD MODE &#039;&#039;&#039;Split&#039;&#039;&#039; indicates the note where the left/right split is made. By clicking Split you may adjust the split point.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : In ACCORDION MODE, the left and right hands are physically separated, so the Split indicator does not appear.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;In ORGAN MODE: VA2 recognizes only left from the Split point the chords for accompaniment! From the Split point to the right end of the keys you can play melody!&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The dashes after [ACCORDION] or [C3]  indicates the agreement recognized and played by the arranger (U.S. encryption) when it is in operation.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FRAME R ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Frame R shows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;In the first line, selected instrument or timbre for the right hand af the accordion or the  right  side of  the  split  point  for  pianists  (ROCK  PIANO  in the example above).&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;In the  second  line, the group stamp RIGHT voice (PIANO in the example)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;In the third line, the tone of the second voice (VIOLA in the example).&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== PLAYER A ==&lt;br /&gt;
In this area, you can load the styles of different formats (Ketron, YAMAHA and ROLAND), MIDI Sequences (*. Mid), the KARAOKE files (*. Kar). &lt;br /&gt;
The  cursor  on  the  name  of  the  SONG  is  displayed  in  a  yellow  name  tag  STYLE  used,  for example:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig33.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PLAYER B ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;In this area, you can load audio files (*. Mp3, *. Wav, *. Wma). &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The active player has his letter surrounded by a white rectangle.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Also be aware that the play function of Player B can only be operated from an external controller, such as your midi keyboard or Korg NanoKontrol2 or similar.&lt;br /&gt;
Controls can be &amp;lt;Start/Stop&amp;gt; &amp;lt;Crossfader&amp;gt; between Player A and Player B&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5._FUNCTIONS_vA2&amp;diff=541</id>
		<title>5. FUNCTIONS vA2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5._FUNCTIONS_vA2&amp;diff=541"/>
		<updated>2016-02-14T17:20:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;By default &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; starts in full screen mode.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;If you wish a different window size or arrangement, double-click on the background of the main window to resize it.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt; Right click opens a pop-up window for [[File: save as.jpg |200px]] saving the &amp;quot;User&amp;quot; startup size of the main window.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig1Interfaceva.jpg |640px ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=3._FEATURES&amp;diff=540</id>
		<title>3. FEATURES</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=3._FEATURES&amp;diff=540"/>
		<updated>2016-02-14T17:17:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; provides an easy and full control of the sound module: Changing the Tone Multi effect, Sound&lt;br /&gt;
Synthesis, Mixer on 16 MIDI channels, Eastern Range, Organ Drawbars, Splits, Layers, etc. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; includes an special and optimized real-time executive for exceptional musical arranging, with &lt;br /&gt;
sophisticated computer modeling algorithm principles of orchestration and harmony rules. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; lets you play styles in size but Ketron YAMAHA and ROLAND.  Native compatibility is &lt;br /&gt;
complete without  converters. The legendary grooves, wah-wah guitars, mounted bass, brass &lt;br /&gt;
riffs, furious Latin rhythms, guitars&#039; Unplugged ... $$&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; can be controlled remotely from your MIDI keyboard controllers, or by keyboard&lt;br /&gt;
(wireless?) from your computer. All functions can be assigned in one click! &lt;br /&gt;
Included 400 new sounds (up to 5 layers) of exceptional richness for Ketron SD2 module. &lt;br /&gt;
Further: Possibility to connect two MIDI instruments. Mode split (Split) simple and flexible. &lt;br /&gt;
Total control DRAWBARS, for lovers of the Organs classic draw-bars.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;With &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;, your sound module is operated at its maximum. You could never imagined such potential capabilities!&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The development team &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; consists exclusively of passionate musicians who want, above all, &lt;br /&gt;
the realization of a powerful and effective tool for stage and sharing this initiative with other&lt;br /&gt;
professional or amateur musicians throughout the world. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;We are listening to your comments and suggestions to change the software so that it matches &lt;br /&gt;
your needs. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;We help you install and configure the software, and we are committed to getting your  full&lt;br /&gt;
satisfaction.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=2._PRINCIPLE_OF_OPERATION&amp;diff=539</id>
		<title>2. PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=2._PRINCIPLE_OF_OPERATION&amp;diff=539"/>
		<updated>2016-02-14T17:12:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /*  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Connect to the computer your favorite MIDI instrument (usually a keyboard with a MIDI or &lt;br /&gt;
USB output, but also guitar MIDI, MIDI accordion ...) &lt;br /&gt;
Connect to the computer a MIDI synthesizer (sound generator)  &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; recognises  &amp;quot;real  time&amp;quot;  played  arrangements  and  generates  a  complete &lt;br /&gt;
orchestration  in  the  chosen  style,  while  allowing  you  full  control  over  all  aspects  of  your &lt;br /&gt;
instrumental performance.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Rather than  developing  software  with  thousands  of  parameters  to  enter  into  menus  and sub-menus, we opted for a more integrated approach.  We decided to offer a ready-to-use solution for  the musician, from beginning to end, for the chain of sound production. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Of course, the software is inherently scalable and we are in constant technological monitoring to &lt;br /&gt;
integrate progressively solutions that really seem workable for the musician. &lt;br /&gt;
Our first choice turned to integration Ketron SD2 sound module.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Here is one of the possible configurations  for the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig78.jpg |360px] | center]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.1._WINDOWS_PROGRAM&amp;diff=511</id>
		<title>5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.1._WINDOWS_PROGRAM&amp;diff=511"/>
		<updated>2015-12-20T18:43:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* vARRANGER ² */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== OPTIONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig2.jpg  |640px  ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This window (Fig3) shows the available options for the vA2. It allows to configure midi ports, controllers, song chords,Master, Arabic scale. The effects is only available in the yamaha mode. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig3.jpg  |280px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MIDI PORTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  window  allows  you  to  choose  or  MIDI  interfaces that  will  be  active  in  IN  and  OUT from &lt;br /&gt;
those connected to the computer. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- [[File:Tabelle1.jpg |640px  | center]]   in case we need it again --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=wikitable style=&amp;quot;margin: auto;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! MIDI Input || &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Feature || Notes and Observations&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| MIDI IN 1 || MIDI Instrument &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI Controller&lt;br /&gt;
| This is the default input and is particularly suitable for everyday use from a master keyboard. It can receive:&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI notes to be played by the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;LEFT&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; part.&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI Notes to be played by the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;RIGHT&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; part.&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI notes to control the arranger.&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI notes to assign messages in the menu CONTROLLERS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional &amp;amp;lowast;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI IN 2  || MIDI Instrument &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI Controller&lt;br /&gt;
| This input allows you to connect a second MIDI Instrument.&lt;br /&gt;
*If &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Play Notes&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is checked, then the notes received here will also be played by &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*If &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Play Notes&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;not&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; checked, then the notes received here can be used, for example, to adjust volume or panning, etc..&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional &amp;amp;lowast;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI IN 3  || MIDI Controller&lt;br /&gt;
| This input is reserved for the use only of a MIDI controller.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; JOYSTICK || Commands&lt;br /&gt;
| This option allows &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; to receive external commands from a USB connected device&lt;br /&gt;
with a joystick-type operation, for example, analogue pedals with a USB interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;lowast; Provided that the MIDI interface is provided with several MIDI IN input. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
KEYBOARD MODE: By default &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL &lt;br /&gt;
1 (Fig. 4) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selectingMIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible &lt;br /&gt;
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right),the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and &lt;br /&gt;
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI LED FEEDBACK&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
Some MIDI controllers such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2have buttons that can illuminate, &lt;br /&gt;
these lights can beings controlled via MIDI.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;VIDEO:&#039;&#039;&#039;   http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE&lt;br /&gt;
This option gives you a visual acknowledgment without having to look at the computer screen. &lt;br /&gt;
For example, we assign 4 buttons variations ABCD arranger, button change during turns. &lt;br /&gt;
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS. &lt;br /&gt;
In the figure below is selected in the MIDI controller MIDI IN 2nd by checking the LED feedback &lt;br /&gt;
box this MIDI (Fig. 6) entrance, you can choose theMIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for &lt;br /&gt;
the  KORG  nanoKONTROL2  the  KORG  Kontrol  Editor  program  (available  on  the  website &lt;br /&gt;
KORG) and select is used:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
- CONTROL MODE = CC &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Similarly, for each button, choose: &lt;br /&gt;
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication,Write Scene Data.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI OUT:&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module. &lt;br /&gt;
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and &lt;br /&gt;
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4 &lt;br /&gt;
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.&lt;br /&gt;
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers. &lt;br /&gt;
GM2  mode  is  recommended  in  all  other  cases,  such  as the  Hypersonic  2  VST  or  other  GM compatible VST.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SYNCRO OUT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so he agrees to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
With this option &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; can play in rhythm with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer, drum machine, etc.. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If  you  do  not  use  this  function,  it  is  advisable  to leave  unchecked  the  box,  because  it  sends continuous MIDI messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; By selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3. &lt;br /&gt;
This option allows for example to double the polyphony of sound modules Ketron adding other modules. &lt;br /&gt;
START button to confirm the settings during initialinstallation or change thereafter.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== CONTROLLERS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This window allows you to manage the behavior of &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; against external controls, they are: &lt;br /&gt;
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To  assign  a  function  to  an  external  controller,  we  choose  first  the  desired  among  those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button.  All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example:&#039;&#039;&#039; Here, various functions &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC  keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At  the  bottom  of  the  window  CONTROLLERS  (OPTIONS  /, scroll  MIDI  events  entering &lt;br /&gt;
vArranger  (outside  of  active  sensing  messages  and  midi  clock).  This  can  be  useful  to  know  what instruments and MIDI controllers send.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SONG CHORDS ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== SONG CHORDS is a 2 in 1 function that allows you to: ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Create A Chordsheet =====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS, &lt;br /&gt;
SONG CHORDS. &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; then opens the chord grid of the song on the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
* By clicking on a measure, we enter the chord for the selected beat. &lt;br /&gt;
* By  clicking  on  the  upper  part  of  the  measure,  one  can  select  a  variation  from  those  of  the current  style  (A, B, C, D, Main,  Fill,  Intro,  Ending.). For  each  style and for  each  of  its  sections are show its  style name, and in brackets, its duration in  measures. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once  you  click  on  measure,  the data my be set  the  mouse,  or  by playing a MIDI instrument, or by typing the letters on the ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the &#039;&#039;&#039;MENU CONTROLLERS&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you have chords in the grid, you can listen the full accompaniment by using the button &#039;&#039;&#039;PLAY SONG&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
You can also transpose the SONG CHORDS by semitone, without re-entering data, simply by clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;TRANSPOSE + or -&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A right-click in a measure opens the following pop-up window:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From this window you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;INSERT&#039;&#039;&#039; one or more measures (four measures in the example above).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;SELECT FROM -&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; this measure  to another measure &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;-TO SELECT&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;SELECT ALL&#039;&#039;&#039; measures in the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;DESELECT ALL&#039;&#039;&#039; measures in the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;COPY&#039;&#039;&#039; your selection to the clipboard.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;PASTE&#039;&#039;&#039; your selection from the clipboard.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;PASTE &#039;?&#039; TIMES&#039;&#039;&#039; your selection several times.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;DELETE&#039;&#039;&#039;  the selection or measure.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;CLEAR&#039;&#039;&#039; the selection or measure. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;TRANSPOSE -&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;TRANSPOSE +&#039;&#039;&#039; the selection or measure.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;PLAY FROM HERE&#039;&#039;&#039; plays the accompaniment from this measure&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for this measure, each beat during play is highlighted in a salmon pink colour as below in an example in 3/4 time: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Some actions require a confirmation like this: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The insertion of 24 measures will extends the window by those 24 measures.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Save your song by using the &#039;&#039;&#039;SAVE SONG&#039;&#039; button, setting appropriate song name an location. The &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORDS&#039;&#039;&#039; option is already checked, so press the &#039;&#039;&#039;SAVE&#039;&#039;&#039;  button to finish.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can quickly and easily create MIDI accompaniment files for sharing, by clicking on &#039;&#039;&#039;EXPORT TO MIDIFILE&#039;&#039;&#039;. The file should open in any professional MIDI sequencer.&lt;br /&gt;
From this base, to simplify work, add VST audio tracks of your choice ... and burn your CD.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Set Up the vRIFF Function: =====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORDS&#039;&#039;&#039; can be used in another manner.  Enter some  chords into the &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORD&#039;&#039;&#039; window, for example: C Am F  G,  then closes the window, launch &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;  (START) and play some chords. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Above the four variations of the style (Main A, B,C, D)  there is a button  &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF&#039;&#039;&#039;. Clicking it changes its colour what you  hear  is  now  controlled  by  the  series  of  chords  previously returned accompaniment.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button: &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : Right click on the button shows vRIFF SONG CHORDSediting window. &lt;br /&gt;
Pianists  now  have  both  hands  free  to  play  other  things,  and  the  left  hand  does  not  control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF cheek&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Can  regain  control  of  the  fix  to  ANY  TIME  by  clicking  on  the  button  &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF,  or  until  the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF thenresumes its gray).&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should  be  noted  that  the  instructions  SONG  CHORD  have  priority  in  case  of  simultaneous orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu. &lt;br /&gt;
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Features&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; :&lt;br /&gt;
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once  the  chord  grid  entry,  you  can  try  other  styles on  the  same  grid  by  pressing  the  button vRIFF. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MIDI EVENTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== MASTER ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;BASS  BOOST : &#039;&#039;&#039; Adjusts  the equalizer  by  selecting  the  correct frequency  and  gain.  Asterisks &lt;br /&gt;
indicate default values. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI INPUT GAIN: &#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of &lt;br /&gt;
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to &lt;br /&gt;
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to &lt;br /&gt;
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument, &lt;br /&gt;
if the permits. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MY SD2/SD4 Freezes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once &lt;br /&gt;
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : This option is checked by default, appears if a  SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT &lt;br /&gt;
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If  your  SD2  does  not  crash  when  reading  &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;midi  test-it &amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;  is  better  to  shoot  and  all  the  midi messages are sent. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;CHORD  RECOGNITION  THRESHOLD  VELOCITY : &#039;&#039;&#039; Ability  to  filter  the  notes  low  intensity  to avoid unwanted chord changes. This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists because unwanted &lt;br /&gt;
notes  are  easily  sent  by  open  strings  touched. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== EFFECTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== ARABIC SCALE ===&lt;br /&gt;
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original &lt;br /&gt;
intonation. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;NB&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;:  To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==  MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
On the top bar of the main window, there are four icons, each representing one of the four MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== the vARRANGER ² icon ==&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PANIC ==&lt;br /&gt;
With low quality MIDI interface, some MIDI messages can be lost, and this result in some never ending notes, or wrong chord recognition.&lt;br /&gt;
This red button sends the command  &amp;quot;ALL NOTES OFF&amp;quot; on all MIDI channels, with the intention to stop all sound, and tries to reset most of the actual settings of vArranger.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note that if the problem involves, for example, a disconnected MIDI cable, then the message can&#039;t arrive and any previously played notes will remain audible.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== TIME ==&lt;br /&gt;
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== MINIMIZE AND CLOSE ICONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
These are located at the right-hand end of the top-bar and work like the usual Windows minimize and close icons. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A click on the minimize button of the window also momentarily frees keys assigned to PC keyboard for &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, in CONTROLLERS, you can assign the &amp;quot;MINIMIZE / RESTORE APP&amp;quot; function to the PC Escape (Esc) key.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Then, a first press of the &amp;quot;Esc&amp;quot; key will minimize the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; window, the second press restores the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; window to the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Double-clicking somewhere in the black background will brings the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; window from normal to full screen and vice versa.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When in the normal mode, you can also move and resize the window in the usual way.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.1._WINDOWS_PROGRAM&amp;diff=510</id>
		<title>5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.1._WINDOWS_PROGRAM&amp;diff=510"/>
		<updated>2015-12-20T18:41:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* Set Up the vRIFF Function: */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== OPTIONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig2.jpg  |640px  ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This window (Fig3) shows the available options for the vA2. It allows to configure midi ports, controllers, song chords,Master, Arabic scale. The effects is only available in the yamaha mode. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig3.jpg  |280px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MIDI PORTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  window  allows  you  to  choose  or  MIDI  interfaces that  will  be  active  in  IN  and  OUT from &lt;br /&gt;
those connected to the computer. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- [[File:Tabelle1.jpg |640px  | center]]   in case we need it again --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=wikitable style=&amp;quot;margin: auto;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! MIDI Input || &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Feature || Notes and Observations&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| MIDI IN 1 || MIDI Instrument &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI Controller&lt;br /&gt;
| This is the default input and is particularly suitable for everyday use from a master keyboard. It can receive:&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI notes to be played by the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;LEFT&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; part.&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI Notes to be played by the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;RIGHT&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; part.&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI notes to control the arranger.&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI notes to assign messages in the menu CONTROLLERS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional &amp;amp;lowast;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI IN 2  || MIDI Instrument &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI Controller&lt;br /&gt;
| This input allows you to connect a second MIDI Instrument.&lt;br /&gt;
*If &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Play Notes&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is checked, then the notes received here will also be played by &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*If &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Play Notes&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;not&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; checked, then the notes received here can be used, for example, to adjust volume or panning, etc..&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional &amp;amp;lowast;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI IN 3  || MIDI Controller&lt;br /&gt;
| This input is reserved for the use only of a MIDI controller.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; JOYSTICK || Commands&lt;br /&gt;
| This option allows &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; to receive external commands from a USB connected device&lt;br /&gt;
with a joystick-type operation, for example, analogue pedals with a USB interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;lowast; Provided that the MIDI interface is provided with several MIDI IN input. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
KEYBOARD MODE: By default &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL &lt;br /&gt;
1 (Fig. 4) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selectingMIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible &lt;br /&gt;
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right),the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and &lt;br /&gt;
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI LED FEEDBACK&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
Some MIDI controllers such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2have buttons that can illuminate, &lt;br /&gt;
these lights can beings controlled via MIDI.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;VIDEO:&#039;&#039;&#039;   http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE&lt;br /&gt;
This option gives you a visual acknowledgment without having to look at the computer screen. &lt;br /&gt;
For example, we assign 4 buttons variations ABCD arranger, button change during turns. &lt;br /&gt;
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS. &lt;br /&gt;
In the figure below is selected in the MIDI controller MIDI IN 2nd by checking the LED feedback &lt;br /&gt;
box this MIDI (Fig. 6) entrance, you can choose theMIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for &lt;br /&gt;
the  KORG  nanoKONTROL2  the  KORG  Kontrol  Editor  program  (available  on  the  website &lt;br /&gt;
KORG) and select is used:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
- CONTROL MODE = CC &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Similarly, for each button, choose: &lt;br /&gt;
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication,Write Scene Data.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI OUT:&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module. &lt;br /&gt;
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and &lt;br /&gt;
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4 &lt;br /&gt;
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.&lt;br /&gt;
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers. &lt;br /&gt;
GM2  mode  is  recommended  in  all  other  cases,  such  as the  Hypersonic  2  VST  or  other  GM compatible VST.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SYNCRO OUT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so he agrees to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
With this option &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; can play in rhythm with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer, drum machine, etc.. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If  you  do  not  use  this  function,  it  is  advisable  to leave  unchecked  the  box,  because  it  sends continuous MIDI messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; By selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3. &lt;br /&gt;
This option allows for example to double the polyphony of sound modules Ketron adding other modules. &lt;br /&gt;
START button to confirm the settings during initialinstallation or change thereafter.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== CONTROLLERS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This window allows you to manage the behavior of &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; against external controls, they are: &lt;br /&gt;
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To  assign  a  function  to  an  external  controller,  we  choose  first  the  desired  among  those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button.  All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example:&#039;&#039;&#039; Here, various functions &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC  keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At  the  bottom  of  the  window  CONTROLLERS  (OPTIONS  /, scroll  MIDI  events  entering &lt;br /&gt;
vArranger  (outside  of  active  sensing  messages  and  midi  clock).  This  can  be  useful  to  know  what instruments and MIDI controllers send.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SONG CHORDS ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== SONG CHORDS is a 2 in 1 function that allows you to: ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Create A Chordsheet =====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS, &lt;br /&gt;
SONG CHORDS. &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; then opens the chord grid of the song on the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
* By clicking on a measure, we enter the chord for the selected beat. &lt;br /&gt;
* By  clicking  on  the  upper  part  of  the  measure,  one  can  select  a  variation  from  those  of  the current  style  (A, B, C, D, Main,  Fill,  Intro,  Ending.). For  each  style and for  each  of  its  sections are show its  style name, and in brackets, its duration in  measures. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once  you  click  on  measure,  the data my be set  the  mouse,  or  by playing a MIDI instrument, or by typing the letters on the ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the &#039;&#039;&#039;MENU CONTROLLERS&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you have chords in the grid, you can listen the full accompaniment by using the button &#039;&#039;&#039;PLAY SONG&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
You can also transpose the SONG CHORDS by semitone, without re-entering data, simply by clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;TRANSPOSE + or -&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A right-click in a measure opens the following pop-up window:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From this window you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;INSERT&#039;&#039;&#039; one or more measures (four measures in the example above).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;SELECT FROM -&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; this measure  to another measure &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;-TO SELECT&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;SELECT ALL&#039;&#039;&#039; measures in the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;DESELECT ALL&#039;&#039;&#039; measures in the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;COPY&#039;&#039;&#039; your selection to the clipboard.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;PASTE&#039;&#039;&#039; your selection from the clipboard.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;PASTE &#039;?&#039; TIMES&#039;&#039;&#039; your selection several times.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;DELETE&#039;&#039;&#039;  the selection or measure.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;CLEAR&#039;&#039;&#039; the selection or measure. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;TRANSPOSE -&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;TRANSPOSE +&#039;&#039;&#039; the selection or measure.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;PLAY FROM HERE&#039;&#039;&#039; plays the accompaniment from this measure&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for this measure, each beat during play is highlighted in a salmon pink colour as below in an example in 3/4 time: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Some actions require a confirmation like this: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The insertion of 24 measures will extends the window by those 24 measures.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Save your song by using the &#039;&#039;&#039;SAVE SONG&#039;&#039; button, setting appropriate song name an location. The &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORDS&#039;&#039;&#039; option is already checked, so press the &#039;&#039;&#039;SAVE&#039;&#039;&#039;  button to finish.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can quickly and easily create MIDI accompaniment files for sharing, by clicking on &#039;&#039;&#039;EXPORT TO MIDIFILE&#039;&#039;&#039;. The file should open in any professional MIDI sequencer.&lt;br /&gt;
From this base, to simplify work, add VST audio tracks of your choice ... and burn your CD.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Set Up the vRIFF Function: =====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORDS&#039;&#039;&#039; can be used in another manner.  Enter some  chords into the &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORD&#039;&#039;&#039; window, for example: C Am F  G,  then closes the window, launch &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;  (START) and play some chords. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Above the four variations of the style (Main A, B,C, D)  there is a button  &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF&#039;&#039;&#039;. Clicking it changes its colour what you  hear  is  now  controlled  by  the  series  of  chords  previously returned accompaniment.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button: &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : Right click on the button shows vRIFF SONG CHORDSediting window. &lt;br /&gt;
Pianists  now  have  both  hands  free  to  play  other  things,  and  the  left  hand  does  not  control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF cheek&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Can  regain  control  of  the  fix  to  ANY  TIME  by  clicking  on  the  button  &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF,  or  until  the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF thenresumes its gray).&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should  be  noted  that  the  instructions  SONG  CHORD  have  priority  in  case  of  simultaneous orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu. &lt;br /&gt;
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Features&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; :&lt;br /&gt;
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once  the  chord  grid  entry,  you  can  try  other  styles on  the  same  grid  by  pressing  the  button vRIFF. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MIDI EVENTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== MASTER ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;BASS  BOOST : &#039;&#039;&#039; Adjusts  the equalizer  by  selecting  the  correct frequency  and  gain.  Asterisks &lt;br /&gt;
indicate default values. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI INPUT GAIN: &#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of &lt;br /&gt;
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to &lt;br /&gt;
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to &lt;br /&gt;
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument, &lt;br /&gt;
if the permits. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MY SD2/SD4 Freezes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once &lt;br /&gt;
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : This option is checked by default, appears if a  SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT &lt;br /&gt;
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If  your  SD2  does  not  crash  when  reading  &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;midi  test-it &amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;  is  better  to  shoot  and  all  the  midi messages are sent. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;CHORD  RECOGNITION  THRESHOLD  VELOCITY : &#039;&#039;&#039; Ability  to  filter  the  notes  low  intensity  to avoid unwanted chord changes. This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists because unwanted &lt;br /&gt;
notes  are  easily  sent  by  open  strings  touched. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== EFFECTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== ARABIC SCALE ===&lt;br /&gt;
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original &lt;br /&gt;
intonation. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;NB&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;:  To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==  MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
On the top bar of the main window, there are four icons, each representing one of the four MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== vARRANGER ² ==&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== PANIC ==&lt;br /&gt;
With low quality MIDI interface, some MIDI messages can be lost, and this result in some never ending notes, or wrong chord recognition.&lt;br /&gt;
This red button sends the command  &amp;quot;ALL NOTES OFF&amp;quot; on all MIDI channels, with the intention to stop all sound, and tries to reset most of the actual settings of vArranger.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note that if the problem involves, for example, a disconnected MIDI cable, then the message can&#039;t arrive and any previously played notes will remain audible.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== TIME ==&lt;br /&gt;
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== MINIMIZE AND CLOSE ICONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
These are located at the right-hand end of the top-bar and work like the usual Windows minimize and close icons. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A click on the minimize button of the window also momentarily frees keys assigned to PC keyboard for &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, in CONTROLLERS, you can assign the &amp;quot;MINIMIZE / RESTORE APP&amp;quot; function to the PC Escape (Esc) key.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Then, a first press of the &amp;quot;Esc&amp;quot; key will minimize the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; window, the second press restores the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; window to the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Double-clicking somewhere in the black background will brings the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; window from normal to full screen and vice versa.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When in the normal mode, you can also move and resize the window in the usual way.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.1._WINDOWS_PROGRAM&amp;diff=509</id>
		<title>5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.1._WINDOWS_PROGRAM&amp;diff=509"/>
		<updated>2015-12-20T18:41:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* Create A Chordsheet */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== OPTIONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig2.jpg  |640px  ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This window (Fig3) shows the available options for the vA2. It allows to configure midi ports, controllers, song chords,Master, Arabic scale. The effects is only available in the yamaha mode. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig3.jpg  |280px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MIDI PORTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  window  allows  you  to  choose  or  MIDI  interfaces that  will  be  active  in  IN  and  OUT from &lt;br /&gt;
those connected to the computer. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- [[File:Tabelle1.jpg |640px  | center]]   in case we need it again --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=wikitable style=&amp;quot;margin: auto;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! MIDI Input || &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Feature || Notes and Observations&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| MIDI IN 1 || MIDI Instrument &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI Controller&lt;br /&gt;
| This is the default input and is particularly suitable for everyday use from a master keyboard. It can receive:&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI notes to be played by the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;LEFT&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; part.&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI Notes to be played by the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;RIGHT&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; part.&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI notes to control the arranger.&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI notes to assign messages in the menu CONTROLLERS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional &amp;amp;lowast;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI IN 2  || MIDI Instrument &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI Controller&lt;br /&gt;
| This input allows you to connect a second MIDI Instrument.&lt;br /&gt;
*If &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Play Notes&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is checked, then the notes received here will also be played by &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*If &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Play Notes&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;not&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; checked, then the notes received here can be used, for example, to adjust volume or panning, etc..&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional &amp;amp;lowast;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI IN 3  || MIDI Controller&lt;br /&gt;
| This input is reserved for the use only of a MIDI controller.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; JOYSTICK || Commands&lt;br /&gt;
| This option allows &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; to receive external commands from a USB connected device&lt;br /&gt;
with a joystick-type operation, for example, analogue pedals with a USB interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;lowast; Provided that the MIDI interface is provided with several MIDI IN input. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
KEYBOARD MODE: By default &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL &lt;br /&gt;
1 (Fig. 4) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selectingMIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible &lt;br /&gt;
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right),the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and &lt;br /&gt;
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI LED FEEDBACK&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
Some MIDI controllers such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2have buttons that can illuminate, &lt;br /&gt;
these lights can beings controlled via MIDI.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;VIDEO:&#039;&#039;&#039;   http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE&lt;br /&gt;
This option gives you a visual acknowledgment without having to look at the computer screen. &lt;br /&gt;
For example, we assign 4 buttons variations ABCD arranger, button change during turns. &lt;br /&gt;
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS. &lt;br /&gt;
In the figure below is selected in the MIDI controller MIDI IN 2nd by checking the LED feedback &lt;br /&gt;
box this MIDI (Fig. 6) entrance, you can choose theMIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for &lt;br /&gt;
the  KORG  nanoKONTROL2  the  KORG  Kontrol  Editor  program  (available  on  the  website &lt;br /&gt;
KORG) and select is used:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
- CONTROL MODE = CC &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Similarly, for each button, choose: &lt;br /&gt;
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication,Write Scene Data.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI OUT:&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module. &lt;br /&gt;
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and &lt;br /&gt;
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4 &lt;br /&gt;
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.&lt;br /&gt;
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers. &lt;br /&gt;
GM2  mode  is  recommended  in  all  other  cases,  such  as the  Hypersonic  2  VST  or  other  GM compatible VST.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SYNCRO OUT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so he agrees to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
With this option &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; can play in rhythm with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer, drum machine, etc.. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If  you  do  not  use  this  function,  it  is  advisable  to leave  unchecked  the  box,  because  it  sends continuous MIDI messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; By selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3. &lt;br /&gt;
This option allows for example to double the polyphony of sound modules Ketron adding other modules. &lt;br /&gt;
START button to confirm the settings during initialinstallation or change thereafter.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== CONTROLLERS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This window allows you to manage the behavior of &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; against external controls, they are: &lt;br /&gt;
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To  assign  a  function  to  an  external  controller,  we  choose  first  the  desired  among  those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button.  All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example:&#039;&#039;&#039; Here, various functions &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC  keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At  the  bottom  of  the  window  CONTROLLERS  (OPTIONS  /, scroll  MIDI  events  entering &lt;br /&gt;
vArranger  (outside  of  active  sensing  messages  and  midi  clock).  This  can  be  useful  to  know  what instruments and MIDI controllers send.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SONG CHORDS ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== SONG CHORDS is a 2 in 1 function that allows you to: ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Create A Chordsheet =====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS, &lt;br /&gt;
SONG CHORDS. &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; then opens the chord grid of the song on the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
* By clicking on a measure, we enter the chord for the selected beat. &lt;br /&gt;
* By  clicking  on  the  upper  part  of  the  measure,  one  can  select  a  variation  from  those  of  the current  style  (A, B, C, D, Main,  Fill,  Intro,  Ending.). For  each  style and for  each  of  its  sections are show its  style name, and in brackets, its duration in  measures. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once  you  click  on  measure,  the data my be set  the  mouse,  or  by playing a MIDI instrument, or by typing the letters on the ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the &#039;&#039;&#039;MENU CONTROLLERS&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you have chords in the grid, you can listen the full accompaniment by using the button &#039;&#039;&#039;PLAY SONG&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
You can also transpose the SONG CHORDS by semitone, without re-entering data, simply by clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;TRANSPOSE + or -&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A right-click in a measure opens the following pop-up window:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From this window you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;INSERT&#039;&#039;&#039; one or more measures (four measures in the example above).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;SELECT FROM -&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; this measure  to another measure &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;-TO SELECT&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;SELECT ALL&#039;&#039;&#039; measures in the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;DESELECT ALL&#039;&#039;&#039; measures in the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;COPY&#039;&#039;&#039; your selection to the clipboard.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;PASTE&#039;&#039;&#039; your selection from the clipboard.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;PASTE &#039;?&#039; TIMES&#039;&#039;&#039; your selection several times.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;DELETE&#039;&#039;&#039;  the selection or measure.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;CLEAR&#039;&#039;&#039; the selection or measure. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;TRANSPOSE -&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;TRANSPOSE +&#039;&#039;&#039; the selection or measure.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;PLAY FROM HERE&#039;&#039;&#039; plays the accompaniment from this measure&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for this measure, each beat during play is highlighted in a salmon pink colour as below in an example in 3/4 time: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Some actions require a confirmation like this: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The insertion of 24 measures will extends the window by those 24 measures.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Save your song by using the &#039;&#039;&#039;SAVE SONG&#039;&#039; button, setting appropriate song name an location. The &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORDS&#039;&#039;&#039; option is already checked, so press the &#039;&#039;&#039;SAVE&#039;&#039;&#039;  button to finish.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can quickly and easily create MIDI accompaniment files for sharing, by clicking on &#039;&#039;&#039;EXPORT TO MIDIFILE&#039;&#039;&#039;. The file should open in any professional MIDI sequencer.&lt;br /&gt;
From this base, to simplify work, add VST audio tracks of your choice ... and burn your CD.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Set Up the vRIFF Function: =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORDS&#039;&#039;&#039; can be used in another manner.  Enter some  chords into the &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORD&#039;&#039;&#039; window, for example: C Am F  G,  then closes the window, launch &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;  (START) and play some chords. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Above the four variations of the style (Main A, B,C, D)  there is a button  &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF&#039;&#039;&#039;. Clicking it changes its colour what you  hear  is  now  controlled  by  the  series  of  chords  previously returned accompaniment.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button: &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : Right click on the button shows vRIFF SONG CHORDSediting window. &lt;br /&gt;
Pianists  now  have  both  hands  free  to  play  other  things,  and  the  left  hand  does  not  control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF cheek&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Can  regain  control  of  the  fix  to  ANY  TIME  by  clicking  on  the  button  &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF,  or  until  the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF thenresumes its gray).&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should  be  noted  that  the  instructions  SONG  CHORD  have  priority  in  case  of  simultaneous orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu. &lt;br /&gt;
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Features&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; :&lt;br /&gt;
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once  the  chord  grid  entry,  you  can  try  other  styles on  the  same  grid  by  pressing  the  button vRIFF. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MIDI EVENTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== MASTER ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;BASS  BOOST : &#039;&#039;&#039; Adjusts  the equalizer  by  selecting  the  correct frequency  and  gain.  Asterisks &lt;br /&gt;
indicate default values. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI INPUT GAIN: &#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of &lt;br /&gt;
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to &lt;br /&gt;
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to &lt;br /&gt;
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument, &lt;br /&gt;
if the permits. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MY SD2/SD4 Freezes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once &lt;br /&gt;
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : This option is checked by default, appears if a  SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT &lt;br /&gt;
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If  your  SD2  does  not  crash  when  reading  &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;midi  test-it &amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;  is  better  to  shoot  and  all  the  midi messages are sent. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;CHORD  RECOGNITION  THRESHOLD  VELOCITY : &#039;&#039;&#039; Ability  to  filter  the  notes  low  intensity  to avoid unwanted chord changes. This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists because unwanted &lt;br /&gt;
notes  are  easily  sent  by  open  strings  touched. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== EFFECTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== ARABIC SCALE ===&lt;br /&gt;
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original &lt;br /&gt;
intonation. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;NB&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;:  To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==  MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
On the top bar of the main window, there are four icons, each representing one of the four MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== vARRANGER ² ==&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== PANIC ==&lt;br /&gt;
With low quality MIDI interface, some MIDI messages can be lost, and this result in some never ending notes, or wrong chord recognition.&lt;br /&gt;
This red button sends the command  &amp;quot;ALL NOTES OFF&amp;quot; on all MIDI channels, with the intention to stop all sound, and tries to reset most of the actual settings of vArranger.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note that if the problem involves, for example, a disconnected MIDI cable, then the message can&#039;t arrive and any previously played notes will remain audible.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== TIME ==&lt;br /&gt;
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== MINIMIZE AND CLOSE ICONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
These are located at the right-hand end of the top-bar and work like the usual Windows minimize and close icons. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A click on the minimize button of the window also momentarily frees keys assigned to PC keyboard for &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, in CONTROLLERS, you can assign the &amp;quot;MINIMIZE / RESTORE APP&amp;quot; function to the PC Escape (Esc) key.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Then, a first press of the &amp;quot;Esc&amp;quot; key will minimize the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; window, the second press restores the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; window to the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Double-clicking somewhere in the black background will brings the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; window from normal to full screen and vice versa.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When in the normal mode, you can also move and resize the window in the usual way.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.1._WINDOWS_PROGRAM&amp;diff=508</id>
		<title>5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.1._WINDOWS_PROGRAM&amp;diff=508"/>
		<updated>2015-12-20T18:40:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* SONG CHORDS is a 2 in 1 function that allows you to: */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== OPTIONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig2.jpg  |640px  ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This window (Fig3) shows the available options for the vA2. It allows to configure midi ports, controllers, song chords,Master, Arabic scale. The effects is only available in the yamaha mode. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig3.jpg  |280px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MIDI PORTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  window  allows  you  to  choose  or  MIDI  interfaces that  will  be  active  in  IN  and  OUT from &lt;br /&gt;
those connected to the computer. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- [[File:Tabelle1.jpg |640px  | center]]   in case we need it again --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=wikitable style=&amp;quot;margin: auto;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! MIDI Input || &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Feature || Notes and Observations&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| MIDI IN 1 || MIDI Instrument &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI Controller&lt;br /&gt;
| This is the default input and is particularly suitable for everyday use from a master keyboard. It can receive:&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI notes to be played by the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;LEFT&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; part.&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI Notes to be played by the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;RIGHT&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; part.&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI notes to control the arranger.&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI notes to assign messages in the menu CONTROLLERS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional &amp;amp;lowast;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI IN 2  || MIDI Instrument &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI Controller&lt;br /&gt;
| This input allows you to connect a second MIDI Instrument.&lt;br /&gt;
*If &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Play Notes&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is checked, then the notes received here will also be played by &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*If &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Play Notes&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;not&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; checked, then the notes received here can be used, for example, to adjust volume or panning, etc..&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional &amp;amp;lowast;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI IN 3  || MIDI Controller&lt;br /&gt;
| This input is reserved for the use only of a MIDI controller.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; JOYSTICK || Commands&lt;br /&gt;
| This option allows &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; to receive external commands from a USB connected device&lt;br /&gt;
with a joystick-type operation, for example, analogue pedals with a USB interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;lowast; Provided that the MIDI interface is provided with several MIDI IN input. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
KEYBOARD MODE: By default &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL &lt;br /&gt;
1 (Fig. 4) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selectingMIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible &lt;br /&gt;
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right),the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and &lt;br /&gt;
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI LED FEEDBACK&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
Some MIDI controllers such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2have buttons that can illuminate, &lt;br /&gt;
these lights can beings controlled via MIDI.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;VIDEO:&#039;&#039;&#039;   http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE&lt;br /&gt;
This option gives you a visual acknowledgment without having to look at the computer screen. &lt;br /&gt;
For example, we assign 4 buttons variations ABCD arranger, button change during turns. &lt;br /&gt;
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS. &lt;br /&gt;
In the figure below is selected in the MIDI controller MIDI IN 2nd by checking the LED feedback &lt;br /&gt;
box this MIDI (Fig. 6) entrance, you can choose theMIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for &lt;br /&gt;
the  KORG  nanoKONTROL2  the  KORG  Kontrol  Editor  program  (available  on  the  website &lt;br /&gt;
KORG) and select is used:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
- CONTROL MODE = CC &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Similarly, for each button, choose: &lt;br /&gt;
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication,Write Scene Data.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI OUT:&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module. &lt;br /&gt;
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and &lt;br /&gt;
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4 &lt;br /&gt;
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.&lt;br /&gt;
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers. &lt;br /&gt;
GM2  mode  is  recommended  in  all  other  cases,  such  as the  Hypersonic  2  VST  or  other  GM compatible VST.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SYNCRO OUT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so he agrees to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
With this option &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; can play in rhythm with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer, drum machine, etc.. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If  you  do  not  use  this  function,  it  is  advisable  to leave  unchecked  the  box,  because  it  sends continuous MIDI messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; By selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3. &lt;br /&gt;
This option allows for example to double the polyphony of sound modules Ketron adding other modules. &lt;br /&gt;
START button to confirm the settings during initialinstallation or change thereafter.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== CONTROLLERS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This window allows you to manage the behavior of &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; against external controls, they are: &lt;br /&gt;
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To  assign  a  function  to  an  external  controller,  we  choose  first  the  desired  among  those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button.  All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example:&#039;&#039;&#039; Here, various functions &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC  keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At  the  bottom  of  the  window  CONTROLLERS  (OPTIONS  /, scroll  MIDI  events  entering &lt;br /&gt;
vArranger  (outside  of  active  sensing  messages  and  midi  clock).  This  can  be  useful  to  know  what instruments and MIDI controllers send.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SONG CHORDS ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== SONG CHORDS is a 2 in 1 function that allows you to: ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Create A Chordsheet =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS, &lt;br /&gt;
SONG CHORDS. &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; then opens the chord grid of the song on the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
* By clicking on a measure, we enter the chord for the selected beat. &lt;br /&gt;
* By  clicking  on  the  upper  part  of  the  measure,  one  can  select  a  variation  from  those  of  the current  style  (A, B, C, D, Main,  Fill,  Intro,  Ending.). For  each  style and for  each  of  its  sections are show its  style name, and in brackets, its duration in  measures. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once  you  click  on  measure,  the data my be set  the  mouse,  or  by playing a MIDI instrument, or by typing the letters on the ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the &#039;&#039;&#039;MENU CONTROLLERS&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you have chords in the grid, you can listen the full accompaniment by using the button &#039;&#039;&#039;PLAY SONG&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
You can also transpose the SONG CHORDS by semitone, without re-entering data, simply by clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;TRANSPOSE + or -&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A right-click in a measure opens the following pop-up window:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From this window you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;INSERT&#039;&#039;&#039; one or more measures (four measures in the example above).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;SELECT FROM -&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; this measure  to another measure &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;-TO SELECT&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;SELECT ALL&#039;&#039;&#039; measures in the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;DESELECT ALL&#039;&#039;&#039; measures in the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;COPY&#039;&#039;&#039; your selection to the clipboard.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;PASTE&#039;&#039;&#039; your selection from the clipboard.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;PASTE &#039;?&#039; TIMES&#039;&#039;&#039; your selection several times.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;DELETE&#039;&#039;&#039;  the selection or measure.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;CLEAR&#039;&#039;&#039; the selection or measure. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;TRANSPOSE -&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;TRANSPOSE +&#039;&#039;&#039; the selection or measure.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;PLAY FROM HERE&#039;&#039;&#039; plays the accompaniment from this measure&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for this measure, each beat during play is highlighted in a salmon pink colour as below in an example in 3/4 time: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Some actions require a confirmation like this: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The insertion of 24 measures will extends the window by those 24 measures.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Save your song by using the &#039;&#039;&#039;SAVE SONG&#039;&#039; button, setting appropriate song name an location. The &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORDS&#039;&#039;&#039; option is already checked, so press the &#039;&#039;&#039;SAVE&#039;&#039;&#039;  button to finish.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can quickly and easily create MIDI accompaniment files for sharing, by clicking on &#039;&#039;&#039;EXPORT TO MIDIFILE&#039;&#039;&#039;. The file should open in any professional MIDI sequencer.&lt;br /&gt;
From this base, to simplify work, add VST audio tracks of your choice ... and burn your CD.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
= Set Up the vRIFF Function: =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORDS&#039;&#039;&#039; can be used in another manner.  Enter some  chords into the &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORD&#039;&#039;&#039; window, for example: C Am F  G,  then closes the window, launch &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;  (START) and play some chords. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Above the four variations of the style (Main A, B,C, D)  there is a button  &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF&#039;&#039;&#039;. Clicking it changes its colour what you  hear  is  now  controlled  by  the  series  of  chords  previously returned accompaniment.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button: &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : Right click on the button shows vRIFF SONG CHORDSediting window. &lt;br /&gt;
Pianists  now  have  both  hands  free  to  play  other  things,  and  the  left  hand  does  not  control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF cheek&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Can  regain  control  of  the  fix  to  ANY  TIME  by  clicking  on  the  button  &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF,  or  until  the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF thenresumes its gray).&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should  be  noted  that  the  instructions  SONG  CHORD  have  priority  in  case  of  simultaneous orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu. &lt;br /&gt;
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Features&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; :&lt;br /&gt;
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once  the  chord  grid  entry,  you  can  try  other  styles on  the  same  grid  by  pressing  the  button vRIFF. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MIDI EVENTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== MASTER ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;BASS  BOOST : &#039;&#039;&#039; Adjusts  the equalizer  by  selecting  the  correct frequency  and  gain.  Asterisks &lt;br /&gt;
indicate default values. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI INPUT GAIN: &#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of &lt;br /&gt;
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to &lt;br /&gt;
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to &lt;br /&gt;
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument, &lt;br /&gt;
if the permits. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MY SD2/SD4 Freezes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once &lt;br /&gt;
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : This option is checked by default, appears if a  SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT &lt;br /&gt;
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If  your  SD2  does  not  crash  when  reading  &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;midi  test-it &amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;  is  better  to  shoot  and  all  the  midi messages are sent. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;CHORD  RECOGNITION  THRESHOLD  VELOCITY : &#039;&#039;&#039; Ability  to  filter  the  notes  low  intensity  to avoid unwanted chord changes. This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists because unwanted &lt;br /&gt;
notes  are  easily  sent  by  open  strings  touched. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== EFFECTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== ARABIC SCALE ===&lt;br /&gt;
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original &lt;br /&gt;
intonation. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;NB&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;:  To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==  MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
On the top bar of the main window, there are four icons, each representing one of the four MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== vARRANGER ² ==&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== PANIC ==&lt;br /&gt;
With low quality MIDI interface, some MIDI messages can be lost, and this result in some never ending notes, or wrong chord recognition.&lt;br /&gt;
This red button sends the command  &amp;quot;ALL NOTES OFF&amp;quot; on all MIDI channels, with the intention to stop all sound, and tries to reset most of the actual settings of vArranger.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note that if the problem involves, for example, a disconnected MIDI cable, then the message can&#039;t arrive and any previously played notes will remain audible.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== TIME ==&lt;br /&gt;
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== MINIMIZE AND CLOSE ICONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
These are located at the right-hand end of the top-bar and work like the usual Windows minimize and close icons. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A click on the minimize button of the window also momentarily frees keys assigned to PC keyboard for &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, in CONTROLLERS, you can assign the &amp;quot;MINIMIZE / RESTORE APP&amp;quot; function to the PC Escape (Esc) key.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Then, a first press of the &amp;quot;Esc&amp;quot; key will minimize the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; window, the second press restores the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; window to the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Double-clicking somewhere in the black background will brings the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; window from normal to full screen and vice versa.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When in the normal mode, you can also move and resize the window in the usual way.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.1._WINDOWS_PROGRAM&amp;diff=507</id>
		<title>5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.1._WINDOWS_PROGRAM&amp;diff=507"/>
		<updated>2015-12-20T18:37:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* SONG CHORDS 2 in 1 function that allows you to: */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== OPTIONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig2.jpg  |640px  ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This window (Fig3) shows the available options for the vA2. It allows to configure midi ports, controllers, song chords,Master, Arabic scale. The effects is only available in the yamaha mode. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig3.jpg  |280px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MIDI PORTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  window  allows  you  to  choose  or  MIDI  interfaces that  will  be  active  in  IN  and  OUT from &lt;br /&gt;
those connected to the computer. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- [[File:Tabelle1.jpg |640px  | center]]   in case we need it again --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=wikitable style=&amp;quot;margin: auto;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! MIDI Input || &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Feature || Notes and Observations&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| MIDI IN 1 || MIDI Instrument &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI Controller&lt;br /&gt;
| This is the default input and is particularly suitable for everyday use from a master keyboard. It can receive:&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI notes to be played by the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;LEFT&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; part.&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI Notes to be played by the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;RIGHT&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; part.&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI notes to control the arranger.&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI notes to assign messages in the menu CONTROLLERS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional &amp;amp;lowast;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI IN 2  || MIDI Instrument &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI Controller&lt;br /&gt;
| This input allows you to connect a second MIDI Instrument.&lt;br /&gt;
*If &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Play Notes&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is checked, then the notes received here will also be played by &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*If &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Play Notes&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;not&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; checked, then the notes received here can be used, for example, to adjust volume or panning, etc..&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional &amp;amp;lowast;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI IN 3  || MIDI Controller&lt;br /&gt;
| This input is reserved for the use only of a MIDI controller.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; JOYSTICK || Commands&lt;br /&gt;
| This option allows &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; to receive external commands from a USB connected device&lt;br /&gt;
with a joystick-type operation, for example, analogue pedals with a USB interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;lowast; Provided that the MIDI interface is provided with several MIDI IN input. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
KEYBOARD MODE: By default &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL &lt;br /&gt;
1 (Fig. 4) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selectingMIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible &lt;br /&gt;
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right),the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and &lt;br /&gt;
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI LED FEEDBACK&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
Some MIDI controllers such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2have buttons that can illuminate, &lt;br /&gt;
these lights can beings controlled via MIDI.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;VIDEO:&#039;&#039;&#039;   http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE&lt;br /&gt;
This option gives you a visual acknowledgment without having to look at the computer screen. &lt;br /&gt;
For example, we assign 4 buttons variations ABCD arranger, button change during turns. &lt;br /&gt;
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS. &lt;br /&gt;
In the figure below is selected in the MIDI controller MIDI IN 2nd by checking the LED feedback &lt;br /&gt;
box this MIDI (Fig. 6) entrance, you can choose theMIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for &lt;br /&gt;
the  KORG  nanoKONTROL2  the  KORG  Kontrol  Editor  program  (available  on  the  website &lt;br /&gt;
KORG) and select is used:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
- CONTROL MODE = CC &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Similarly, for each button, choose: &lt;br /&gt;
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication,Write Scene Data.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI OUT:&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module. &lt;br /&gt;
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and &lt;br /&gt;
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4 &lt;br /&gt;
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.&lt;br /&gt;
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers. &lt;br /&gt;
GM2  mode  is  recommended  in  all  other  cases,  such  as the  Hypersonic  2  VST  or  other  GM compatible VST.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SYNCRO OUT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so he agrees to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
With this option &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; can play in rhythm with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer, drum machine, etc.. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If  you  do  not  use  this  function,  it  is  advisable  to leave  unchecked  the  box,  because  it  sends continuous MIDI messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; By selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3. &lt;br /&gt;
This option allows for example to double the polyphony of sound modules Ketron adding other modules. &lt;br /&gt;
START button to confirm the settings during initialinstallation or change thereafter.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== CONTROLLERS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This window allows you to manage the behavior of &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; against external controls, they are: &lt;br /&gt;
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To  assign  a  function  to  an  external  controller,  we  choose  first  the  desired  among  those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button.  All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example:&#039;&#039;&#039; Here, various functions &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC  keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At  the  bottom  of  the  window  CONTROLLERS  (OPTIONS  /, scroll  MIDI  events  entering &lt;br /&gt;
vArranger  (outside  of  active  sensing  messages  and  midi  clock).  This  can  be  useful  to  know  what instruments and MIDI controllers send.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SONG CHORDS ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== SONG CHORDS is a 2 in 1 function that allows you to: ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Create A Chordsheet =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS, &lt;br /&gt;
SONG CHORDS. &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; then opens the chord grid of the song on the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
* By clicking on a measure, we enter the chord for the selected beat. &lt;br /&gt;
* By  clicking  on  the  upper  part  of  the  measure,  one  can  select  a  variation  from  those  of  the current  style  (A, B, C, D, Main,  Fill,  Intro,  Ending.). For  each  style and for  each  of  its  sections are show its  style name, and in brackets, its duration in  measures. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once  you  click  on  measure,  the data my be set  the  mouse,  or  by playing a MIDI instrument, or by typing the letters on the ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the &#039;&#039;&#039;MENU CONTROLLERS&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you have chords in the grid, you can listen the full accompaniment by using the button &#039;&#039;&#039;PLAY SONG&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
You can also transpose the SONG CHORDS by semitone, without re-entering data, simply by clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;TRANSPOSE + or -&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A right-click in a measure opens the following pop-up window:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From this window you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;INSERT&#039;&#039;&#039; one or more measures (four measures in the example above).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;SELECT FROM -&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; this measure  to another measure &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;-TO SELECT&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;SELECT ALL&#039;&#039;&#039; measures in the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;DESELECT ALL&#039;&#039;&#039; measures in the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;COPY&#039;&#039;&#039; your selection to the clipboard.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;PASTE&#039;&#039;&#039; your selection from the clipboard.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;PASTE &#039;?&#039; TIMES&#039;&#039;&#039; your selection several times.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;DELETE&#039;&#039;&#039;  the selection or measure.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;CLEAR&#039;&#039;&#039; the selection or measure. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;TRANSPOSE -&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;TRANSPOSE +&#039;&#039;&#039; the selection or measure.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;PLAY FROM HERE&#039;&#039;&#039; plays the accompaniment from this measure&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for this measure, each beat during play is highlighted in a salmon pink colour as below in an example in 3/4 time: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Some actions require a confirmation like this: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The insertion of 24 measures will extends the window by those 24 measures.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Save your song by using the &#039;&#039;&#039;SAVE SONG&#039;&#039; button, setting appropriate song name an location. The &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORDS&#039;&#039;&#039; option is already checked, so press the &#039;&#039;&#039;SAVE&#039;&#039;&#039;  button to finish.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can quickly and easily create MIDI accompaniment files for sharing, by clicking on &#039;&#039;&#039;EXPORT TO MIDIFILE&#039;&#039;&#039;. The file should open in any professional MIDI sequencer.&lt;br /&gt;
From this base, to simplify work, add VST audio tracks of your choice ... and burn your CD.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
= Set Up the vRIFF Function: =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORDS&#039;&#039;&#039; can be used in another manner.  Enter some  chords into the &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORD&#039;&#039;&#039; window, for example: C Am F  G,  then closes the window, launch &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;  (START) and play some chords. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Above the four variations of the style (Main A, B,C, D)  there is a button  &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF&#039;&#039;&#039;. Clicking it changes its colour what you  hear  is  now  controlled  by  the  series  of  chords  previously returned accompaniment.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button: &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : Right click on the button shows vRIFF SONG CHORDSediting window. &lt;br /&gt;
Pianists  now  have  both  hands  free  to  play  other  things,  and  the  left  hand  does  not  control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF cheek&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Can  regain  control  of  the  fix  to  ANY  TIME  by  clicking  on  the  button  &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF,  or  until  the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF thenresumes its gray).&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should  be  noted  that  the  instructions  SONG  CHORD  have  priority  in  case  of  simultaneous orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu. &lt;br /&gt;
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Features&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; :&lt;br /&gt;
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once  the  chord  grid  entry,  you  can  try  other  styles on  the  same  grid  by  pressing  the  button vRIFF. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MIDI EVENTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== MASTER ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;BASS  BOOST : &#039;&#039;&#039; Adjusts  the equalizer  by  selecting  the  correct frequency  and  gain.  Asterisks &lt;br /&gt;
indicate default values. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI INPUT GAIN: &#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of &lt;br /&gt;
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to &lt;br /&gt;
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to &lt;br /&gt;
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument, &lt;br /&gt;
if the permits. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MY SD2/SD4 Freezes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once &lt;br /&gt;
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : This option is checked by default, appears if a  SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT &lt;br /&gt;
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If  your  SD2  does  not  crash  when  reading  &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;midi  test-it &amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;  is  better  to  shoot  and  all  the  midi messages are sent. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;CHORD  RECOGNITION  THRESHOLD  VELOCITY : &#039;&#039;&#039; Ability  to  filter  the  notes  low  intensity  to avoid unwanted chord changes. This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists because unwanted &lt;br /&gt;
notes  are  easily  sent  by  open  strings  touched. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== EFFECTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== ARABIC SCALE ===&lt;br /&gt;
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original &lt;br /&gt;
intonation. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;NB&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;:  To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==  MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
On the top bar of the main window, there are four icons, each representing one of the four MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== vARRANGER ² ==&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== PANIC ==&lt;br /&gt;
With low quality MIDI interface, some MIDI messages can be lost, and this result in some never ending notes, or wrong chord recognition.&lt;br /&gt;
This red button sends the command  &amp;quot;ALL NOTES OFF&amp;quot; on all MIDI channels, with the intention to stop all sound, and tries to reset most of the actual settings of vArranger.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note that if the problem involves, for example, a disconnected MIDI cable, then the message can&#039;t arrive and any previously played notes will remain audible.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== TIME ==&lt;br /&gt;
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== MINIMIZE AND CLOSE ICONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
These are located at the right-hand end of the top-bar and work like the usual Windows minimize and close icons. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A click on the minimize button of the window also momentarily frees keys assigned to PC keyboard for &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, in CONTROLLERS, you can assign the &amp;quot;MINIMIZE / RESTORE APP&amp;quot; function to the PC Escape (Esc) key.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Then, a first press of the &amp;quot;Esc&amp;quot; key will minimize the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; window, the second press restores the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; window to the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Double-clicking somewhere in the black background will brings the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; window from normal to full screen and vice versa.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When in the normal mode, you can also move and resize the window in the usual way.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.1._WINDOWS_PROGRAM&amp;diff=506</id>
		<title>5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.1._WINDOWS_PROGRAM&amp;diff=506"/>
		<updated>2015-12-20T18:37:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* SONG CHORDS */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== OPTIONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig2.jpg  |640px  ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This window (Fig3) shows the available options for the vA2. It allows to configure midi ports, controllers, song chords,Master, Arabic scale. The effects is only available in the yamaha mode. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig3.jpg  |280px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MIDI PORTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  window  allows  you  to  choose  or  MIDI  interfaces that  will  be  active  in  IN  and  OUT from &lt;br /&gt;
those connected to the computer. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- [[File:Tabelle1.jpg |640px  | center]]   in case we need it again --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=wikitable style=&amp;quot;margin: auto;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! MIDI Input || &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Feature || Notes and Observations&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| MIDI IN 1 || MIDI Instrument &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI Controller&lt;br /&gt;
| This is the default input and is particularly suitable for everyday use from a master keyboard. It can receive:&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI notes to be played by the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;LEFT&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; part.&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI Notes to be played by the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;RIGHT&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; part.&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI notes to control the arranger.&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI notes to assign messages in the menu CONTROLLERS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional &amp;amp;lowast;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI IN 2  || MIDI Instrument &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI Controller&lt;br /&gt;
| This input allows you to connect a second MIDI Instrument.&lt;br /&gt;
*If &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Play Notes&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is checked, then the notes received here will also be played by &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*If &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Play Notes&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;not&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; checked, then the notes received here can be used, for example, to adjust volume or panning, etc..&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional &amp;amp;lowast;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI IN 3  || MIDI Controller&lt;br /&gt;
| This input is reserved for the use only of a MIDI controller.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; JOYSTICK || Commands&lt;br /&gt;
| This option allows &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; to receive external commands from a USB connected device&lt;br /&gt;
with a joystick-type operation, for example, analogue pedals with a USB interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;lowast; Provided that the MIDI interface is provided with several MIDI IN input. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
KEYBOARD MODE: By default &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL &lt;br /&gt;
1 (Fig. 4) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selectingMIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible &lt;br /&gt;
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right),the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and &lt;br /&gt;
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI LED FEEDBACK&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
Some MIDI controllers such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2have buttons that can illuminate, &lt;br /&gt;
these lights can beings controlled via MIDI.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;VIDEO:&#039;&#039;&#039;   http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE&lt;br /&gt;
This option gives you a visual acknowledgment without having to look at the computer screen. &lt;br /&gt;
For example, we assign 4 buttons variations ABCD arranger, button change during turns. &lt;br /&gt;
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS. &lt;br /&gt;
In the figure below is selected in the MIDI controller MIDI IN 2nd by checking the LED feedback &lt;br /&gt;
box this MIDI (Fig. 6) entrance, you can choose theMIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for &lt;br /&gt;
the  KORG  nanoKONTROL2  the  KORG  Kontrol  Editor  program  (available  on  the  website &lt;br /&gt;
KORG) and select is used:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
- CONTROL MODE = CC &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Similarly, for each button, choose: &lt;br /&gt;
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication,Write Scene Data.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI OUT:&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module. &lt;br /&gt;
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and &lt;br /&gt;
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4 &lt;br /&gt;
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.&lt;br /&gt;
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers. &lt;br /&gt;
GM2  mode  is  recommended  in  all  other  cases,  such  as the  Hypersonic  2  VST  or  other  GM compatible VST.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SYNCRO OUT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so he agrees to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
With this option &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; can play in rhythm with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer, drum machine, etc.. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If  you  do  not  use  this  function,  it  is  advisable  to leave  unchecked  the  box,  because  it  sends continuous MIDI messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; By selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3. &lt;br /&gt;
This option allows for example to double the polyphony of sound modules Ketron adding other modules. &lt;br /&gt;
START button to confirm the settings during initialinstallation or change thereafter.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== CONTROLLERS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This window allows you to manage the behavior of &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; against external controls, they are: &lt;br /&gt;
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To  assign  a  function  to  an  external  controller,  we  choose  first  the  desired  among  those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button.  All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example:&#039;&#039;&#039; Here, various functions &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC  keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At  the  bottom  of  the  window  CONTROLLERS  (OPTIONS  /, scroll  MIDI  events  entering &lt;br /&gt;
vArranger  (outside  of  active  sensing  messages  and  midi  clock).  This  can  be  useful  to  know  what instruments and MIDI controllers send.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SONG CHORDS ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== SONG CHORDS 2 in 1 function that allows you to: ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
= Create A Chordsheet =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS, &lt;br /&gt;
SONG CHORDS. &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; then opens the chord grid of the song on the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
* By clicking on a measure, we enter the chord for the selected beat. &lt;br /&gt;
* By  clicking  on  the  upper  part  of  the  measure,  one  can  select  a  variation  from  those  of  the current  style  (A, B, C, D, Main,  Fill,  Intro,  Ending.). For  each  style and for  each  of  its  sections are show its  style name, and in brackets, its duration in  measures. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once  you  click  on  measure,  the data my be set  the  mouse,  or  by playing a MIDI instrument, or by typing the letters on the ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the &#039;&#039;&#039;MENU CONTROLLERS&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you have chords in the grid, you can listen the full accompaniment by using the button &#039;&#039;&#039;PLAY SONG&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
You can also transpose the SONG CHORDS by semitone, without re-entering data, simply by clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;TRANSPOSE + or -&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A right-click in a measure opens the following pop-up window:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From this window you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;INSERT&#039;&#039;&#039; one or more measures (four measures in the example above).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;SELECT FROM -&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; this measure  to another measure &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;-TO SELECT&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;SELECT ALL&#039;&#039;&#039; measures in the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;DESELECT ALL&#039;&#039;&#039; measures in the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;COPY&#039;&#039;&#039; your selection to the clipboard.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;PASTE&#039;&#039;&#039; your selection from the clipboard.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;PASTE &#039;?&#039; TIMES&#039;&#039;&#039; your selection several times.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;DELETE&#039;&#039;&#039;  the selection or measure.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;CLEAR&#039;&#039;&#039; the selection or measure. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;TRANSPOSE -&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;TRANSPOSE +&#039;&#039;&#039; the selection or measure.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;PLAY FROM HERE&#039;&#039;&#039; plays the accompaniment from this measure&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for this measure, each beat during play is highlighted in a salmon pink colour as below in an example in 3/4 time: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Some actions require a confirmation like this: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The insertion of 24 measures will extends the window by those 24 measures.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Save your song by using the &#039;&#039;&#039;SAVE SONG&#039;&#039; button, setting appropriate song name an location. The &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORDS&#039;&#039;&#039; option is already checked, so press the &#039;&#039;&#039;SAVE&#039;&#039;&#039;  button to finish.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can quickly and easily create MIDI accompaniment files for sharing, by clicking on &#039;&#039;&#039;EXPORT TO MIDIFILE&#039;&#039;&#039;. The file should open in any professional MIDI sequencer.&lt;br /&gt;
From this base, to simplify work, add VST audio tracks of your choice ... and burn your CD.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
= Set Up the vRIFF Function: =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORDS&#039;&#039;&#039; can be used in another manner.  Enter some  chords into the &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORD&#039;&#039;&#039; window, for example: C Am F  G,  then closes the window, launch &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;  (START) and play some chords. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Above the four variations of the style (Main A, B,C, D)  there is a button  &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF&#039;&#039;&#039;. Clicking it changes its colour what you  hear  is  now  controlled  by  the  series  of  chords  previously returned accompaniment.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button: &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : Right click on the button shows vRIFF SONG CHORDSediting window. &lt;br /&gt;
Pianists  now  have  both  hands  free  to  play  other  things,  and  the  left  hand  does  not  control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF cheek&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Can  regain  control  of  the  fix  to  ANY  TIME  by  clicking  on  the  button  &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF,  or  until  the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF thenresumes its gray).&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should  be  noted  that  the  instructions  SONG  CHORD  have  priority  in  case  of  simultaneous orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu. &lt;br /&gt;
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Features&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; :&lt;br /&gt;
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once  the  chord  grid  entry,  you  can  try  other  styles on  the  same  grid  by  pressing  the  button vRIFF. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MIDI EVENTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== MASTER ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;BASS  BOOST : &#039;&#039;&#039; Adjusts  the equalizer  by  selecting  the  correct frequency  and  gain.  Asterisks &lt;br /&gt;
indicate default values. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI INPUT GAIN: &#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of &lt;br /&gt;
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to &lt;br /&gt;
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to &lt;br /&gt;
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument, &lt;br /&gt;
if the permits. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MY SD2/SD4 Freezes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once &lt;br /&gt;
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : This option is checked by default, appears if a  SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT &lt;br /&gt;
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If  your  SD2  does  not  crash  when  reading  &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;midi  test-it &amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;  is  better  to  shoot  and  all  the  midi messages are sent. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;CHORD  RECOGNITION  THRESHOLD  VELOCITY : &#039;&#039;&#039; Ability  to  filter  the  notes  low  intensity  to avoid unwanted chord changes. This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists because unwanted &lt;br /&gt;
notes  are  easily  sent  by  open  strings  touched. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== EFFECTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== ARABIC SCALE ===&lt;br /&gt;
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original &lt;br /&gt;
intonation. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;NB&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;:  To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==  MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
On the top bar of the main window, there are four icons, each representing one of the four MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== vARRANGER ² ==&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== PANIC ==&lt;br /&gt;
With low quality MIDI interface, some MIDI messages can be lost, and this result in some never ending notes, or wrong chord recognition.&lt;br /&gt;
This red button sends the command  &amp;quot;ALL NOTES OFF&amp;quot; on all MIDI channels, with the intention to stop all sound, and tries to reset most of the actual settings of vArranger.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note that if the problem involves, for example, a disconnected MIDI cable, then the message can&#039;t arrive and any previously played notes will remain audible.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== TIME ==&lt;br /&gt;
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== MINIMIZE AND CLOSE ICONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
These are located at the right-hand end of the top-bar and work like the usual Windows minimize and close icons. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A click on the minimize button of the window also momentarily frees keys assigned to PC keyboard for &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, in CONTROLLERS, you can assign the &amp;quot;MINIMIZE / RESTORE APP&amp;quot; function to the PC Escape (Esc) key.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Then, a first press of the &amp;quot;Esc&amp;quot; key will minimize the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; window, the second press restores the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; window to the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Double-clicking somewhere in the black background will brings the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; window from normal to full screen and vice versa.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When in the normal mode, you can also move and resize the window in the usual way.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.1._WINDOWS_PROGRAM&amp;diff=505</id>
		<title>5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.1._WINDOWS_PROGRAM&amp;diff=505"/>
		<updated>2015-12-20T17:23:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* MIDI PORTS */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== OPTIONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig2.jpg  |640px  ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This window (Fig3) shows the available options for the vA2. It allows to configure midi ports, controllers, song chords,Master, Arabic scale. The effects is only available in the yamaha mode. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig3.jpg  |280px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MIDI PORTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  window  allows  you  to  choose  or  MIDI  interfaces that  will  be  active  in  IN  and  OUT from &lt;br /&gt;
those connected to the computer. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- [[File:Tabelle1.jpg |640px  | center]]   in case we need it again --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=wikitable style=&amp;quot;margin: auto;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! MIDI Input || &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Feature || Notes and Observations&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| MIDI IN 1 || MIDI Instrument &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI Controller&lt;br /&gt;
| This is the default input and is particularly suitable for everyday use from a master keyboard. It can receive:&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI notes to be played by the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;LEFT&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; part.&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI Notes to be played by the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;RIGHT&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; part.&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI notes to control the arranger.&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI notes to assign messages in the menu CONTROLLERS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional &amp;amp;lowast;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI IN 2  || MIDI Instrument &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI Controller&lt;br /&gt;
| This input allows you to connect a second MIDI Instrument.&lt;br /&gt;
*If &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Play Notes&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is checked, then the notes received here will also be played by &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*If &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Play Notes&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;not&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; checked, then the notes received here can be used, for example, to adjust volume or panning, etc..&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional &amp;amp;lowast;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI IN 3  || MIDI Controller&lt;br /&gt;
| This input is reserved for the use only of a MIDI controller.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; JOYSTICK || Commands&lt;br /&gt;
| This option allows &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; to receive external commands from a USB connected device&lt;br /&gt;
with a joystick-type operation, for example, analogue pedals with a USB interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;lowast; Provided that the MIDI interface is provided with several MIDI IN input. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
KEYBOARD MODE: By default &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL &lt;br /&gt;
1 (Fig. 4) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selectingMIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible &lt;br /&gt;
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right),the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and &lt;br /&gt;
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI LED FEEDBACK&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
Some MIDI controllers such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2have buttons that can illuminate, &lt;br /&gt;
these lights can beings controlled via MIDI.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;VIDEO:&#039;&#039;&#039;   http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE&lt;br /&gt;
This option gives you a visual acknowledgment without having to look at the computer screen. &lt;br /&gt;
For example, we assign 4 buttons variations ABCD arranger, button change during turns. &lt;br /&gt;
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS. &lt;br /&gt;
In the figure below is selected in the MIDI controller MIDI IN 2nd by checking the LED feedback &lt;br /&gt;
box this MIDI (Fig. 6) entrance, you can choose theMIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for &lt;br /&gt;
the  KORG  nanoKONTROL2  the  KORG  Kontrol  Editor  program  (available  on  the  website &lt;br /&gt;
KORG) and select is used:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
- CONTROL MODE = CC &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Similarly, for each button, choose: &lt;br /&gt;
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication,Write Scene Data.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI OUT:&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module. &lt;br /&gt;
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and &lt;br /&gt;
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4 &lt;br /&gt;
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.&lt;br /&gt;
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers. &lt;br /&gt;
GM2  mode  is  recommended  in  all  other  cases,  such  as the  Hypersonic  2  VST  or  other  GM compatible VST.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SYNCRO OUT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so he agrees to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
With this option &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; can play in rhythm with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer, drum machine, etc.. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If  you  do  not  use  this  function,  it  is  advisable  to leave  unchecked  the  box,  because  it  sends continuous MIDI messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; By selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3. &lt;br /&gt;
This option allows for example to double the polyphony of sound modules Ketron adding other modules. &lt;br /&gt;
START button to confirm the settings during initialinstallation or change thereafter.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== CONTROLLERS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This window allows you to manage the behavior of &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; against external controls, they are: &lt;br /&gt;
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To  assign  a  function  to  an  external  controller,  we  choose  first  the  desired  among  those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button.  All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example:&#039;&#039;&#039; Here, various functions &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC  keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At  the  bottom  of  the  window  CONTROLLERS  (OPTIONS  /, scroll  MIDI  events  entering &lt;br /&gt;
vArranger  (outside  of  active  sensing  messages  and  midi  clock).  This  can  be  useful  to  know  what instruments and MIDI controllers send.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SONG CHORDS ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORDS 2 in 1 function that allows you to:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Creating chordsheet&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS, &lt;br /&gt;
SONG CHORDS. It then enters the chord grid of the song on the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on a measure, we enter the agreement for the selected time. &lt;br /&gt;
By  clicking  on  the  upper  part  of  the  measure,  one  can  select  a  variation  from  those  of  the current  style  (ABCD Main,  Fill,  Intro,  Ending.).  For  a  given  and for  each  of  its  sections  style, duration in number of measurements is shown in brackets. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once  you  click  on  the  time  of  the  measurement,  the  agreements  between  the  mouse,  or  by playing a MIDI instrument or by typing the letters on the keys ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the &#039;&#039;&#039;MENU CONTROLLERS&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once the chord grid input &#039;&#039;&#039;PLAY SONG can listen the full accompaniment created. It is &lt;br /&gt;
also possible to implement the SONG CHORDS by semitone without re-entering &lt;br /&gt;
data, simply by acting on TRANSPOSE + or -&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Right-click in a time of one measurement opens the following pop-up window:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From this window you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Insert [INSERT] one or more steps (4 steps in the example above) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select from this measurement [SELECT FROM -&amp;gt;] untilthe other measure [&amp;lt;-TO SELECT] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select All [SELECT ALL] and &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Deselect all [DESELECT ALL] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Copy selection [COPY] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Paste Selection [PASTE] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Paste the selection several times [PASTE &#039;?&#039; TIMES]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Remove selection [DELETE], or measure if no selection&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Clear information in the selection [CLEAR], or to the extent if no selection &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Transpose only selected measures [TRANSPOSE-TRANSPOSE +] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Play SONG CHORDS for this measurement [PLAY FROM HERE] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for thismeasurement, the time during the game is the salmon color as below in 3/4 time: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Some actions are validated by a confirmation message like this: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The insertion of data as 24 extends the edit windowup to 48 steps and so on. &lt;br /&gt;
The SAVE button in the SONG SONG SONG CHORDS launches SAVE window with SONG &lt;br /&gt;
CHORDS box already checked! &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to create midi accompaniments very quickly and easily by clicking on EXPORT TO MIDIFILE to generate the MIDI file, it is possible to open it in any professional MIDI sequencer, and from this base to simplify work: add VST audio tracks of ... and burn your CD.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;The vRIFF function:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
The new function  &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORDS can be used in another manière.On some  agreements between the SONG CHORD window. For example: C Am F  G. .. then closes the window: Launch&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;  (START) and play some chords. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Above the four variations of the style (Main ABCD)  There is a button called  &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF. Clicking it changes  color  and  hear  the  now  controlled  by  the  series  of  agreements  previously returned accompaniment.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button: &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : Right click on the button shows vRIFF SONG CHORDSediting window. &lt;br /&gt;
Pianists  now  have  both  hands  free  to  play  other  things,  and  the  left  hand  does  not  control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF cheek&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Can  regain  control  of  the  fix  to  ANY  TIME  by  clicking  on  the  button  &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF,  or  until  the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF thenresumes its gray).&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should  be  noted  that  the  instructions  SONG  CHORD  have  priority  in  case  of  simultaneous orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu. &lt;br /&gt;
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Features&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; :&lt;br /&gt;
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once  the  chord  grid  entry,  you  can  try  other  styles on  the  same  grid  by  pressing  the  button vRIFF. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MIDI EVENTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== MASTER ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;BASS  BOOST : &#039;&#039;&#039; Adjusts  the equalizer  by  selecting  the  correct frequency  and  gain.  Asterisks &lt;br /&gt;
indicate default values. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI INPUT GAIN: &#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of &lt;br /&gt;
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to &lt;br /&gt;
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to &lt;br /&gt;
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument, &lt;br /&gt;
if the permits. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MY SD2/SD4 Freezes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once &lt;br /&gt;
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : This option is checked by default, appears if a  SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT &lt;br /&gt;
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If  your  SD2  does  not  crash  when  reading  &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;midi  test-it &amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;  is  better  to  shoot  and  all  the  midi messages are sent. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;CHORD  RECOGNITION  THRESHOLD  VELOCITY : &#039;&#039;&#039; Ability  to  filter  the  notes  low  intensity  to avoid unwanted chord changes. This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists because unwanted &lt;br /&gt;
notes  are  easily  sent  by  open  strings  touched. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== EFFECTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== ARABIC SCALE ===&lt;br /&gt;
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original &lt;br /&gt;
intonation. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;NB&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;:  To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==  MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
On the top bar of the main window, there are four icons, each representing one of the four MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== vARRANGER ² ==&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== PANIC ==&lt;br /&gt;
With low quality MIDI interface, some MIDI messages can be lost, and this result in some never ending notes, or wrong chord recognition.&lt;br /&gt;
This red button sends the command  &amp;quot;ALL NOTES OFF&amp;quot; on all MIDI channels, with the intention to stop all sound, and tries to reset most of the actual settings of vArranger.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note that if the problem involves, for example, a disconnected MIDI cable, then the message can&#039;t arrive and any previously played notes will remain audible.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== TIME ==&lt;br /&gt;
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== MINIMIZE AND CLOSE ICONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
These are located at the right-hand end of the top-bar and work like the usual Windows minimize and close icons. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A click on the minimize button of the window also momentarily frees keys assigned to PC keyboard for &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, in CONTROLLERS, you can assign the &amp;quot;MINIMIZE / RESTORE APP&amp;quot; function to the PC Escape (Esc) key.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Then, a first press of the &amp;quot;Esc&amp;quot; key will minimize the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; window, the second press restores the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; window to the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Double-clicking somewhere in the black background will brings the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; window from normal to full screen and vice versa.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When in the normal mode, you can also move and resize the window in the usual way.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.11._REALTIME_ARRANGER&amp;diff=497</id>
		<title>5.11. REALTIME ARRANGER</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.11._REALTIME_ARRANGER&amp;diff=497"/>
		<updated>2015-12-18T17:56:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* REAL TIME CONTROL ARRANGER */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== REAL TIME CONTROL ARRANGER ==&lt;br /&gt;
The  control  of  the  arranger  comes  in  different  views,  depending  on  the  origin  of the  STYLE &lt;br /&gt;
loaded, for example:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig72.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig73.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== INTRO ===&lt;br /&gt;
By  default,  &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;  does not select an  &#039;&#039;&#039;INTRO&#039;&#039;&#039;.  An &#039;&#039;&#039;INTRO&#039;&#039;&#039; provides  up  to  three  variations  for  the  introduction from the simpler  (No.  1  or  A)  to  the  richest  (3,  C). The  length  of  the  introduction  is  variable depending  on  the  style,  but  never  less  than  one  measure.  The length  appears  in  the  FRAME  as a blue horizontal progress bar. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
With the arranger stopped, select an &#039;&#039;&#039;INTRO&#039;&#039;&#039; pattern (1, 2 or3), and the button turns red.  Press &#039;&#039;&#039;START&#039;&#039;&#039; and the arranger playss selected INTRO and then steps to the &#039;&#039;&#039;VARIATION A&#039;&#039;&#039;, or to any other variation you have previously selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
During your song, you can again replay the INTRO, by simply clicking on the relevant INTRO button.. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== VARIATION ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; offers according to the origin of the style variations up to 4 A, B, C, D or RIFF and up to 5 FILL IN. These variations each have a different pattern of support in general from simple &amp;quot;A&amp;quot; to the richest &amp;quot;D&amp;quot; some original Ketron styles offer RIFF instead of change &amp;quot;D&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
RIFF  is  a  pre  recorded  musical  phrase  of  several  measures.  Up  to  32  steps,  its  length  is indicated by the blue horizontal thermometer part A, the harmonic grid rotates in the tone of the recent  agreement  struck  before  entering  this  variation.  This  feature  is  very  popular  for enhancing the musician&#039;s improvisation on a given grid. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The change over is indicated by the blue color of the button. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== FILL IN ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; provides up to three reasons for FILL IN BREAK more for Ketron styles and up to 5 FILL &lt;br /&gt;
IN for YAMAHA styles. By default, no FILL is selected, the buttons change color upon selection. &lt;br /&gt;
Arranger Off, selecting a fill / BREAK will start the arranger on the FILL / BREAK preset from its &lt;br /&gt;
start. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  framework  is  provided  with  a  button [[File:Fig73a.jpg | 60px]] which  turns  red  when  selected.  This automatically starts a fill when changing CHANGE according to the following arrangement:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle10.jpg | 360px | center]] &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ENDING ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; provides up to four reasons for terminating the simplest to the most wealthy, the length of the reasons for terminating the style varies but never less than one degree. It appears in the FRAME (blue horizontal thermometer). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : If you start the arranger on ENDING, &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; will stop at the end of the pattern end. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
All  commands  can  be  assigned  by  the  arranger  OPTIONS  /  CONTROLLERS  then CONDUCTOR menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MARKERS ===&lt;br /&gt;
When &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; reads  a  sequence,  the  control  panel  of  the  arranger  becomes  bulletin  board MARKERS which look like.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig74.jpg | 640px | center]] &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A  marker  is  used  for  storing  a  MIDI  file  in  a  precise  position.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039; display the markers present in the MIDI file, in the area of variations arranger. Clicking on a marker &lt;br /&gt;
buttons, reading the MIDI file directly to the start position of this marker.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If  the  MIDI  file  is  being  played,  the  position  change  will  take  place  at  the  end  of  the  measurement, for a smooth transition. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is very useful if you eg public requires additional chorus. You click on the marker Chorus, and  at  the  end  of  the  current  measurement,  a  chorus will  be  chained  perfectly. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In &#039;&#039;&#039;OPTIONS / CONTROLLERS, it is possible to assign up to 15 tags to MIDI buttons, keys or PC ... (Section MARKERS).&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to use the functions assigned to CHANGE CHANGE UP and DOWN arranger keys to move through the markers, with the ability to support several times in a row. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The third option is to use the control usually assigned to variations in key arranger. To do this, use an editor of MIDI files and name tags, so that they contain: Intro Intro 1 or 2 or 3 or Intro or Ending Ending 1 Ending 2 or 3 or 4 or Ending Main Main A or B or C or Main Hand D or Fill In Fill In 1 or 2 or 3 or Fill In Fill In Break.Par example, if the marker is called &amp;quot;Main C&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Solo Guitar  Hand  C&amp;quot;,  you  can  go  to  the  position  of  the  marker  by  pressing  the  button  or  pedal &lt;br /&gt;
assigned to variation 3 arranger.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.10._MIXER&amp;diff=496</id>
		<title>5.10. MIXER</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.10._MIXER&amp;diff=496"/>
		<updated>2015-12-18T17:41:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* CONTEXT MENU TRACK */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== The VOICE Group ==&lt;br /&gt;
This group has 16 voices, each voice can be either on a mixer strip, or arranger on a track MIDI or KAR read file.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Please add +1 to all &amp;quot;Channel MIDI&amp;quot; in left column&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Example: RIGHT1 is MIDI Channel 13&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle7.jpg | 480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig65.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle8.jpg | 640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle8a.jpg | 640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==  SECTION SOUND EDIT ==&lt;br /&gt;
Double-click on one of 16 tracks opens the SOUND EDIT window. Once the open window, a single click on other tracks, update the SOUND EDIT window. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig66.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The tracks LEFT 1, 2, 3, RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4 and 2nd VOICE can be made simple or more complex presets, and the following parameters are added: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;A keyboard play area:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;From Key&#039;&#039;&#039;  and &#039;&#039;&#039;Key To&#039;&#039;&#039; allow you to select the range of of keys(notes) for an action.&lt;br /&gt;
::: Define the &#039;&#039;&#039;KEY From&#039;&#039;&#039; notes by clicking on the displayed value and then play the keyboard the desired note (the number will be displayed.). &lt;br /&gt;
:::Define the &#039;&#039;&#039;Key To&#039;&#039;&#039; note by clicking on the displayed value and then play the keyboard the desired note (which may not be less than &#039;&#039;&#039;From Key&#039;&#039;&#039;). &lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;A velocity range:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;Velocity FROM&#039;&#039;&#039; Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will be generated. A low value corresponds to &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; the maximum is &amp;quot;Sforzando.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;Velocity To&#039;&#039;&#039; Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will no longer generated. This value can not be less than Velocity FROM. &lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;An octave change.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;A transposition in semitones.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These special lanes and 2nd RIGHT and LEFT VOICE allow for example to produce a different tone and a different velocity according to the octave played&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig67.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once these parameters are set you can save the settings using &#039;&#039;&#039;SAVE SOUND&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Additional for the &#039;&#039;&#039;DRUM&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;PERC&#039;&#039;&#039; tracks only&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::Right-click on the DRUM or PERC track and select &#039;&#039;&#039;DRUM MIXER...&#039;&#039;&#039; to access the additional extra settings for the percussion tracks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig68.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Particulars of the Track &#039;&#039;&#039;BASS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You have the ability to save the MANUAL BASS SUSTAIN. To do this, select Manual Bass, double click on the bass track, and change the value of the ReleaseTime. You can then save this setting in CONFIG SAVE STARTUP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SAVE SOUND ==&lt;br /&gt;
SAVE RIGHT SOUND is available from the button [[File:Fig68a.jpg | 120px]]&lt;br /&gt;
and &amp;quot;SOUND ...&amp;quot; The following parameters are stored in SAVE RIGHT SOUND: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle9.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By combining up to 5 tracks (RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4 and 2nd VOICE) it is easy to create complex new sounds. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== CONTEXT MENU TRACK ==&lt;br /&gt;
Right click on a track displays a context menu that allows the following selections: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, right click ACCOMP4:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig69.jpg | 360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===  SEND TO MIDI ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  menu  allows  you  to  route  MIDI  track  this  information  to  multiple  MIDI  outputs,  these &lt;br /&gt;
choices are not mutually exclusive. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : It is possible to use multiple MIDI interfaces with the same names of MIDI ports.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SOUND EDIT ...  ===&lt;br /&gt;
See Section 5.10.2 SOUND EDIT &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DRUM MIXER ...  ===&lt;br /&gt;
See Section xxx DRUM MIXER &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== STYLE MIXER ... ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  command  displays  summary  screen  settings  current  style  for  each  track,  and  each &lt;br /&gt;
variation. (Compatibility Ketron styles to come)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig70.jpg |780| center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== GROUP MASTER/EFFECTS ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig71.jpg |240| center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This group has 4 channels and adjustment effects two groups: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The first track named &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG, we read a sequence or an audio file, or STYLE &#039;&#039;&#039; for the use of a &lt;br /&gt;
style rule by moving the cursor vertical level of the sequence, or the audio file type (0-127) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The second channel named [[File:Fig71b.jpg | 40px ]] adjusted by means of the vertical level of the cursor LEFT section (0 to 127). This path can be selected, which causes the display option [[File:Fig71c.jpg | 90px ]] in VOICE. This feature allows you to associate a bar SOUNDS MY STYLE. A right-click displays &lt;br /&gt;
the popup menu cf. 5.10.4. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  third  path  named in [[File:Fig71d.jpg | 50px ]] adjusted  by  means  of  the  vertical  level  of  the  cursor  RIGHT section (0 to 127). This path can be selected, which causes the column display stamps allowing choice. A right-click displays the popup menu cf. 5.10.4. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth track named  MAST rule acting on the vertical [[File:Fig71e.jpg | 50px ]] rule acting on the vertical slider overall output  level (MASTER) from 0 to 127.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Above, another digital indicator shows white numerals on a black background, it is of polyphony, &lt;br /&gt;
in other words, the number of notes &amp;quot;ON&amp;quot; sent to the sound module. This allows for example, &lt;br /&gt;
whether &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; is receiving MIDI data from the device connected to MIDI IN. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  first  group  of  effects  named  FX1-REVERB  can  select  a  reverb  type  from  eight  types  of &lt;br /&gt;
which OFF (no reverb). The choice is made by clicking on the name of the REVERB in use, a &lt;br /&gt;
drop-down list displays the different reverbs available. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By  clicking  on  the  bottom  of  the  window &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It  clears  the  combo  box  without  applying  the &lt;br /&gt;
changes. &lt;br /&gt;
The maximum level is adjustable reverb chosen in another drop-down list of values: 0 to 16. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The second effect group named FX2 can choose different types of CHORUS DELAY DISTO to &lt;br /&gt;
be applied to different tracks &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Eight different types are available including an  OFF for all &lt;br /&gt;
three FX2 effects. By clicking on the bottom of thewindow &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It clears the combo box without &lt;br /&gt;
applying the changes. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.10._MIXER&amp;diff=495</id>
		<title>5.10. MIXER</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.10._MIXER&amp;diff=495"/>
		<updated>2015-12-18T17:34:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* SAVE SOUND */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== The VOICE Group ==&lt;br /&gt;
This group has 16 voices, each voice can be either on a mixer strip, or arranger on a track MIDI or KAR read file.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Please add +1 to all &amp;quot;Channel MIDI&amp;quot; in left column&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Example: RIGHT1 is MIDI Channel 13&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle7.jpg | 480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig65.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle8.jpg | 640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle8a.jpg | 640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==  SECTION SOUND EDIT ==&lt;br /&gt;
Double-click on one of 16 tracks opens the SOUND EDIT window. Once the open window, a single click on other tracks, update the SOUND EDIT window. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig66.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The tracks LEFT 1, 2, 3, RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4 and 2nd VOICE can be made simple or more complex presets, and the following parameters are added: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;A keyboard play area:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;From Key&#039;&#039;&#039;  and &#039;&#039;&#039;Key To&#039;&#039;&#039; allow you to select the range of of keys(notes) for an action.&lt;br /&gt;
::: Define the &#039;&#039;&#039;KEY From&#039;&#039;&#039; notes by clicking on the displayed value and then play the keyboard the desired note (the number will be displayed.). &lt;br /&gt;
:::Define the &#039;&#039;&#039;Key To&#039;&#039;&#039; note by clicking on the displayed value and then play the keyboard the desired note (which may not be less than &#039;&#039;&#039;From Key&#039;&#039;&#039;). &lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;A velocity range:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;Velocity FROM&#039;&#039;&#039; Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will be generated. A low value corresponds to &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; the maximum is &amp;quot;Sforzando.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;Velocity To&#039;&#039;&#039; Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will no longer generated. This value can not be less than Velocity FROM. &lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;An octave change.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;A transposition in semitones.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These special lanes and 2nd RIGHT and LEFT VOICE allow for example to produce a different tone and a different velocity according to the octave played&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig67.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once these parameters are set you can save the settings using &#039;&#039;&#039;SAVE SOUND&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Additional for the &#039;&#039;&#039;DRUM&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;PERC&#039;&#039;&#039; tracks only&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::Right-click on the DRUM or PERC track and select &#039;&#039;&#039;DRUM MIXER...&#039;&#039;&#039; to access the additional extra settings for the percussion tracks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig68.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Particulars of the Track &#039;&#039;&#039;BASS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You have the ability to save the MANUAL BASS SUSTAIN. To do this, select Manual Bass, double click on the bass track, and change the value of the ReleaseTime. You can then save this setting in CONFIG SAVE STARTUP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SAVE SOUND ==&lt;br /&gt;
SAVE RIGHT SOUND is available from the button [[File:Fig68a.jpg | 120px]]&lt;br /&gt;
and &amp;quot;SOUND ...&amp;quot; The following parameters are stored in SAVE RIGHT SOUND: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle9.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By combining up to 5 tracks (RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4 and 2nd VOICE) it is easy to create complex new sounds. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== CONTEXT MENU TRACK ==&lt;br /&gt;
Right click on a track displays a context menu thatcallows the following selections: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Here, right click ACCOMP4:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig69.jpg | 360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===  SEND TO MIDI ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  menu  allows  you  to  route  MIDI  track  this  information  to  multiple  MIDI  outputs,  these &lt;br /&gt;
choices are not mutually exclusive. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : It is possible to use multiple MIDI interfaces with the same names of MIDI ports.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SOUND EDIT ...  ===&lt;br /&gt;
See Section 5.10.2 SOUND EDIT &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== STYLE MIXER ... ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  command  displays  summary  screen  settings  current  style  for  each  track,  and  each &lt;br /&gt;
variation. (Compatibility Ketron styles to come)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig70.jpg |780| center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== GROUP MASTER/EFFECTS ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig71.jpg |240| center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This group has 4 channels and adjustment effects two groups: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The first track named &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG, we read a sequence or an audio file, or STYLE &#039;&#039;&#039; for the use of a &lt;br /&gt;
style rule by moving the cursor vertical level of the sequence, or the audio file type (0-127) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The second channel named [[File:Fig71b.jpg | 40px ]] adjusted by means of the vertical level of the cursor LEFT section (0 to 127). This path can be selected, which causes the display option [[File:Fig71c.jpg | 90px ]] in VOICE. This feature allows you to associate a bar SOUNDS MY STYLE. A right-click displays &lt;br /&gt;
the popup menu cf. 5.10.4. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  third  path  named in [[File:Fig71d.jpg | 50px ]] adjusted  by  means  of  the  vertical  level  of  the  cursor  RIGHT section (0 to 127). This path can be selected, which causes the column display stamps allowing choice. A right-click displays the popup menu cf. 5.10.4. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth track named  MAST rule acting on the vertical [[File:Fig71e.jpg | 50px ]] rule acting on the vertical slider overall output  level (MASTER) from 0 to 127.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Above, another digital indicator shows white numerals on a black background, it is of polyphony, &lt;br /&gt;
in other words, the number of notes &amp;quot;ON&amp;quot; sent to the sound module. This allows for example, &lt;br /&gt;
whether &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; is receiving MIDI data from the device connected to MIDI IN. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  first  group  of  effects  named  FX1-REVERB  can  select  a  reverb  type  from  eight  types  of &lt;br /&gt;
which OFF (no reverb). The choice is made by clicking on the name of the REVERB in use, a &lt;br /&gt;
drop-down list displays the different reverbs available. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By  clicking  on  the  bottom  of  the  window &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It  clears  the  combo  box  without  applying  the &lt;br /&gt;
changes. &lt;br /&gt;
The maximum level is adjustable reverb chosen in another drop-down list of values: 0 to 16. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The second effect group named FX2 can choose different types of CHORUS DELAY DISTO to &lt;br /&gt;
be applied to different tracks &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Eight different types are available including an  OFF for all &lt;br /&gt;
three FX2 effects. By clicking on the bottom of thewindow &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It clears the combo box without &lt;br /&gt;
applying the changes. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.10._MIXER&amp;diff=494</id>
		<title>5.10. MIXER</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.10._MIXER&amp;diff=494"/>
		<updated>2015-12-18T17:33:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* SECTION SOUND EDIT */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== The VOICE Group ==&lt;br /&gt;
This group has 16 voices, each voice can be either on a mixer strip, or arranger on a track MIDI or KAR read file.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Please add +1 to all &amp;quot;Channel MIDI&amp;quot; in left column&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Example: RIGHT1 is MIDI Channel 13&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle7.jpg | 480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig65.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle8.jpg | 640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle8a.jpg | 640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==  SECTION SOUND EDIT ==&lt;br /&gt;
Double-click on one of 16 tracks opens the SOUND EDIT window. Once the open window, a single click on other tracks, update the SOUND EDIT window. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig66.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The tracks LEFT 1, 2, 3, RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4 and 2nd VOICE can be made simple or more complex presets, and the following parameters are added: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;A keyboard play area:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;From Key&#039;&#039;&#039;  and &#039;&#039;&#039;Key To&#039;&#039;&#039; allow you to select the range of of keys(notes) for an action.&lt;br /&gt;
::: Define the &#039;&#039;&#039;KEY From&#039;&#039;&#039; notes by clicking on the displayed value and then play the keyboard the desired note (the number will be displayed.). &lt;br /&gt;
:::Define the &#039;&#039;&#039;Key To&#039;&#039;&#039; note by clicking on the displayed value and then play the keyboard the desired note (which may not be less than &#039;&#039;&#039;From Key&#039;&#039;&#039;). &lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;A velocity range:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;Velocity FROM&#039;&#039;&#039; Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will be generated. A low value corresponds to &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; the maximum is &amp;quot;Sforzando.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;Velocity To&#039;&#039;&#039; Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will no longer generated. This value can not be less than Velocity FROM. &lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;An octave change.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;A transposition in semitones.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These special lanes and 2nd RIGHT and LEFT VOICE allow for example to produce a different tone and a different velocity according to the octave played&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig67.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once these parameters are set you can save the settings using &#039;&#039;&#039;SAVE SOUND&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Additional for the &#039;&#039;&#039;DRUM&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;PERC&#039;&#039;&#039; tracks only&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::Right-click on the DRUM or PERC track and select &#039;&#039;&#039;DRUM MIXER...&#039;&#039;&#039; to access the additional extra settings for the percussion tracks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig68.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Particulars of the Track &#039;&#039;&#039;BASS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You have the ability to save the MANUAL BASS SUSTAIN. To do this, select Manual Bass, double click on the bass track, and change the value of the ReleaseTime. You can then save this setting in CONFIG SAVE STARTUP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SAVE SOUND ==&lt;br /&gt;
SAVE RIGHT SOUND is available from the button [[File:Fig68a.jpg | 120px]]&lt;br /&gt;
and &amp;quot;SOUND ...&amp;quot; The following parameters are stored in SAVE RIGHT SOUND: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle9.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By combining up to 5 tracks (RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4 and 2nd VOICE) it is easy to create new sounds complex. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== CONTEXT MENU TRACK ==&lt;br /&gt;
Right click on a track displays a context menu thatcallows the following selections: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Here, right click ACCOMP4:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig69.jpg | 360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===  SEND TO MIDI ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  menu  allows  you  to  route  MIDI  track  this  information  to  multiple  MIDI  outputs,  these &lt;br /&gt;
choices are not mutually exclusive. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : It is possible to use multiple MIDI interfaces with the same names of MIDI ports.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SOUND EDIT ...  ===&lt;br /&gt;
See Section 5.10.2 SOUND EDIT &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== STYLE MIXER ... ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  command  displays  summary  screen  settings  current  style  for  each  track,  and  each &lt;br /&gt;
variation. (Compatibility Ketron styles to come)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig70.jpg |780| center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== GROUP MASTER/EFFECTS ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig71.jpg |240| center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This group has 4 channels and adjustment effects two groups: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The first track named &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG, we read a sequence or an audio file, or STYLE &#039;&#039;&#039; for the use of a &lt;br /&gt;
style rule by moving the cursor vertical level of the sequence, or the audio file type (0-127) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The second channel named [[File:Fig71b.jpg | 40px ]] adjusted by means of the vertical level of the cursor LEFT section (0 to 127). This path can be selected, which causes the display option [[File:Fig71c.jpg | 90px ]] in VOICE. This feature allows you to associate a bar SOUNDS MY STYLE. A right-click displays &lt;br /&gt;
the popup menu cf. 5.10.4. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  third  path  named in [[File:Fig71d.jpg | 50px ]] adjusted  by  means  of  the  vertical  level  of  the  cursor  RIGHT section (0 to 127). This path can be selected, which causes the column display stamps allowing choice. A right-click displays the popup menu cf. 5.10.4. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth track named  MAST rule acting on the vertical [[File:Fig71e.jpg | 50px ]] rule acting on the vertical slider overall output  level (MASTER) from 0 to 127.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Above, another digital indicator shows white numerals on a black background, it is of polyphony, &lt;br /&gt;
in other words, the number of notes &amp;quot;ON&amp;quot; sent to the sound module. This allows for example, &lt;br /&gt;
whether &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; is receiving MIDI data from the device connected to MIDI IN. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  first  group  of  effects  named  FX1-REVERB  can  select  a  reverb  type  from  eight  types  of &lt;br /&gt;
which OFF (no reverb). The choice is made by clicking on the name of the REVERB in use, a &lt;br /&gt;
drop-down list displays the different reverbs available. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By  clicking  on  the  bottom  of  the  window &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It  clears  the  combo  box  without  applying  the &lt;br /&gt;
changes. &lt;br /&gt;
The maximum level is adjustable reverb chosen in another drop-down list of values: 0 to 16. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The second effect group named FX2 can choose different types of CHORUS DELAY DISTO to &lt;br /&gt;
be applied to different tracks &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Eight different types are available including an  OFF for all &lt;br /&gt;
three FX2 effects. By clicking on the bottom of thewindow &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It clears the combo box without &lt;br /&gt;
applying the changes. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.10._MIXER&amp;diff=493</id>
		<title>5.10. MIXER</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.10._MIXER&amp;diff=493"/>
		<updated>2015-12-18T17:31:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* SECTION SOUND EDIT */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== The VOICE Group ==&lt;br /&gt;
This group has 16 voices, each voice can be either on a mixer strip, or arranger on a track MIDI or KAR read file.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Please add +1 to all &amp;quot;Channel MIDI&amp;quot; in left column&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Example: RIGHT1 is MIDI Channel 13&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle7.jpg | 480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig65.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle8.jpg | 640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle8a.jpg | 640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==  SECTION SOUND EDIT ==&lt;br /&gt;
Double-click on one of 16 tracks opens the SOUND EDIT window. Once the open window, a single click on other tracks, update the SOUND EDIT window. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig66.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The tracks LEFT 1, 2, 3, RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4 and 2nd VOICE can be made simple or more complex presets, and the following parameters are added: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;A keyboard play area:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;From Key&#039;&#039;&#039;  and &#039;&#039;&#039;Key To&#039;&#039;&#039; allow you to select the range of of keys(notes) for an action.&lt;br /&gt;
::: Define the &#039;&#039;&#039;KEY From&#039;&#039;&#039; notes by clicking on the displayed value and then play the keyboard the desired note (the number will be displayed.). &lt;br /&gt;
:::Define the &#039;&#039;&#039;Key To&#039;&#039;&#039; note by clicking on the displayed value and then play the keyboard the desired note (which may not be less than &#039;&#039;&#039;From Key&#039;&#039;&#039;). &lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;A velocity range:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;Velocity FROM&#039;&#039;&#039; Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will be generated. A low value corresponds to &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; the maximum is &amp;quot;Sforzando.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;Velocity To&#039;&#039;&#039; Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will no longer generated. This value can not be less than Velocity FROM. &lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;An octave change.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;A transposition in semitones.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These special lanes and 2nd RIGHT and LEFT VOICE allow for example to produce a different tone and a different velocity according to the octave played&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig67.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once these parameters are set you can save the settings using &#039;&#039;&#039;SAVE SOUND&#039;&#039;&#039;. (clarify and/or more detail?)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Additional for the &#039;&#039;&#039;DRUM&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;PERC&#039;&#039;&#039; tracks only&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::Right-click on the DRUM or PERC track and select &#039;&#039;&#039;DRUM MIXER...&#039;&#039;&#039; to access the additional extra settings for the percussion tracks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig68.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Particulars of the Track &#039;&#039;&#039;BASS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You have the ability to save the MANUAL BASS SUSTAIN. To do this, select Manual Bass, double click on the bass track, and change the value of the ReleaseTime. You can then save this setting in CONFIG SAVE STARTUP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SAVE SOUND ==&lt;br /&gt;
SAVE RIGHT SOUND is available from the button [[File:Fig68a.jpg | 120px]]&lt;br /&gt;
and &amp;quot;SOUND ...&amp;quot; The following parameters are stored in SAVE RIGHT SOUND: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle9.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By combining up to 5 tracks (RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4 and 2nd VOICE) it is easy to create new sounds complex. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== CONTEXT MENU TRACK ==&lt;br /&gt;
Right click on a track displays a context menu thatcallows the following selections: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Here, right click ACCOMP4:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig69.jpg | 360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===  SEND TO MIDI ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  menu  allows  you  to  route  MIDI  track  this  information  to  multiple  MIDI  outputs,  these &lt;br /&gt;
choices are not mutually exclusive. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : It is possible to use multiple MIDI interfaces with the same names of MIDI ports.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SOUND EDIT ...  ===&lt;br /&gt;
See Section 5.10.2 SOUND EDIT &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== STYLE MIXER ... ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  command  displays  summary  screen  settings  current  style  for  each  track,  and  each &lt;br /&gt;
variation. (Compatibility Ketron styles to come)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig70.jpg |780| center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== GROUP MASTER/EFFECTS ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig71.jpg |240| center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This group has 4 channels and adjustment effects two groups: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The first track named &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG, we read a sequence or an audio file, or STYLE &#039;&#039;&#039; for the use of a &lt;br /&gt;
style rule by moving the cursor vertical level of the sequence, or the audio file type (0-127) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The second channel named [[File:Fig71b.jpg | 40px ]] adjusted by means of the vertical level of the cursor LEFT section (0 to 127). This path can be selected, which causes the display option [[File:Fig71c.jpg | 90px ]] in VOICE. This feature allows you to associate a bar SOUNDS MY STYLE. A right-click displays &lt;br /&gt;
the popup menu cf. 5.10.4. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  third  path  named in [[File:Fig71d.jpg | 50px ]] adjusted  by  means  of  the  vertical  level  of  the  cursor  RIGHT section (0 to 127). This path can be selected, which causes the column display stamps allowing choice. A right-click displays the popup menu cf. 5.10.4. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth track named  MAST rule acting on the vertical [[File:Fig71e.jpg | 50px ]] rule acting on the vertical slider overall output  level (MASTER) from 0 to 127.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Above, another digital indicator shows white numerals on a black background, it is of polyphony, &lt;br /&gt;
in other words, the number of notes &amp;quot;ON&amp;quot; sent to the sound module. This allows for example, &lt;br /&gt;
whether &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; is receiving MIDI data from the device connected to MIDI IN. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  first  group  of  effects  named  FX1-REVERB  can  select  a  reverb  type  from  eight  types  of &lt;br /&gt;
which OFF (no reverb). The choice is made by clicking on the name of the REVERB in use, a &lt;br /&gt;
drop-down list displays the different reverbs available. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By  clicking  on  the  bottom  of  the  window &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It  clears  the  combo  box  without  applying  the &lt;br /&gt;
changes. &lt;br /&gt;
The maximum level is adjustable reverb chosen in another drop-down list of values: 0 to 16. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The second effect group named FX2 can choose different types of CHORUS DELAY DISTO to &lt;br /&gt;
be applied to different tracks &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Eight different types are available including an  OFF for all &lt;br /&gt;
three FX2 effects. By clicking on the bottom of thewindow &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It clears the combo box without &lt;br /&gt;
applying the changes. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.10._MIXER&amp;diff=492</id>
		<title>5.10. MIXER</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.10._MIXER&amp;diff=492"/>
		<updated>2015-12-18T16:05:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* The VOICE Group */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== The VOICE Group ==&lt;br /&gt;
This group has 16 voices, each voice can be either on a mixer strip, or arranger on a track MIDI or KAR read file.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Please add +1 to all &amp;quot;Channel MIDI&amp;quot; in left column&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Example: RIGHT1 is MIDI Channel 13&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle7.jpg | 480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig65.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle8.jpg | 640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle8a.jpg | 640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==  SECTION SOUND EDIT ==&lt;br /&gt;
Double-click on one of 16 tracks opens the SOUND EDIT window. Once the open window, a single click on other tracks, update the SOUND EDITwindow. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig66.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When editing tracks RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4 and 2nd VOICE LEFT and 1, 2, 3 can be made simple or more complex presets. The above parameters is added: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A play area: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;From Key &#039;&#039;&#039;  and Key To allow you to select the range of action, we define KEY From notes by clicking on the displayed value and then play the keyboard the desired note (the number will be displayed.). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
We define Key To note (which may not be less than From Key) by clicking on the &lt;br /&gt;
displayed value and then play the keyboard the desired note (which may not be less than From Key). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Particular velocity: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Velocity FROM &#039;&#039;&#039; Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will be generated. A low value corresponds to &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; the maximum is &amp;quot;Sforzando.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Velocity To&#039;&#039;&#039; Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will no longer generated. This value can not be less than Velocity FROM. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A change octave. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A transposition in semitones. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These special lanes and 2nd RIGHT and LEFT VOICE allow for example to produce a different tone and a different velocity according to the octave played&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig67.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The parameters are set you can save your work in SAVE SOUND &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Distinctive Ways &#039;&#039;&#039;DRUM&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;PERC&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By double-clicking on the track or PERC DRUM SOUND EDIT window appears with new &lt;br /&gt;
percussion own settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig68.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These two channels have a DRUM MIXER &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Particulars of the Track &#039;&#039;&#039;BASS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ability to save the MANUAL BASS SUSTAIN. To do this, select Manual Bass, double click on the bass track, and change the value of the ReleaseTime. You can then save this setting in CONFIG SAVE STARTUP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SAVE SOUND ==&lt;br /&gt;
SAVE RIGHT SOUND is available from the button [[File:Fig68a.jpg | 120px]]&lt;br /&gt;
and &amp;quot;SOUND ...&amp;quot; The following parameters are stored in SAVE RIGHT SOUND: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle9.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By combining up to 5 tracks (RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4 and 2nd VOICE) it is easy to create new sounds complex. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== CONTEXT MENU TRACK ==&lt;br /&gt;
Right click on a track displays a context menu thatcallows the following selections: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Here, right click ACCOMP4:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig69.jpg | 360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===  SEND TO MIDI ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  menu  allows  you  to  route  MIDI  track  this  information  to  multiple  MIDI  outputs,  these &lt;br /&gt;
choices are not mutually exclusive. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : It is possible to use multiple MIDI interfaces with the same names of MIDI ports.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SOUND EDIT ...  ===&lt;br /&gt;
See Section 5.10.2 SOUND EDIT &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== STYLE MIXER ... ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  command  displays  summary  screen  settings  current  style  for  each  track,  and  each &lt;br /&gt;
variation. (Compatibility Ketron styles to come)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig70.jpg |780| center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== GROUP MASTER/EFFECTS ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig71.jpg |240| center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This group has 4 channels and adjustment effects two groups: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The first track named &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG, we read a sequence or an audio file, or STYLE &#039;&#039;&#039; for the use of a &lt;br /&gt;
style rule by moving the cursor vertical level of the sequence, or the audio file type (0-127) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The second channel named [[File:Fig71b.jpg | 40px ]] adjusted by means of the vertical level of the cursor LEFT section (0 to 127). This path can be selected, which causes the display option [[File:Fig71c.jpg | 90px ]] in VOICE. This feature allows you to associate a bar SOUNDS MY STYLE. A right-click displays &lt;br /&gt;
the popup menu cf. 5.10.4. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  third  path  named in [[File:Fig71d.jpg | 50px ]] adjusted  by  means  of  the  vertical  level  of  the  cursor  RIGHT section (0 to 127). This path can be selected, which causes the column display stamps allowing choice. A right-click displays the popup menu cf. 5.10.4. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth track named  MAST rule acting on the vertical [[File:Fig71e.jpg | 50px ]] rule acting on the vertical slider overall output  level (MASTER) from 0 to 127.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Above, another digital indicator shows white numerals on a black background, it is of polyphony, &lt;br /&gt;
in other words, the number of notes &amp;quot;ON&amp;quot; sent to the sound module. This allows for example, &lt;br /&gt;
whether &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; is receiving MIDI data from the device connected to MIDI IN. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  first  group  of  effects  named  FX1-REVERB  can  select  a  reverb  type  from  eight  types  of &lt;br /&gt;
which OFF (no reverb). The choice is made by clicking on the name of the REVERB in use, a &lt;br /&gt;
drop-down list displays the different reverbs available. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By  clicking  on  the  bottom  of  the  window &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It  clears  the  combo  box  without  applying  the &lt;br /&gt;
changes. &lt;br /&gt;
The maximum level is adjustable reverb chosen in another drop-down list of values: 0 to 16. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The second effect group named FX2 can choose different types of CHORUS DELAY DISTO to &lt;br /&gt;
be applied to different tracks &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Eight different types are available including an  OFF for all &lt;br /&gt;
three FX2 effects. By clicking on the bottom of thewindow &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It clears the combo box without &lt;br /&gt;
applying the changes. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.10._MIXER&amp;diff=491</id>
		<title>5.10. MIXER</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.10._MIXER&amp;diff=491"/>
		<updated>2015-12-18T15:55:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* The VOICE Panel */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== The VOICE Group ==&lt;br /&gt;
This group has 16 voices, each voice can be either on a runway or arranger on a track MIDI or KAR read file.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Please add +1 to all &amp;quot;Channel MIDI&amp;quot; in left column&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Example: RIGHT1 is MIDI Channel 13&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle7.jpg | 480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig65.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle8.jpg | 640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle8a.jpg | 640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==  SECTION SOUND EDIT ==&lt;br /&gt;
Double-click on one of 16 tracks opens the SOUND EDIT window. Once the open window, a single click on other tracks, update the SOUND EDITwindow. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig66.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When editing tracks RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4 and 2nd VOICE LEFT and 1, 2, 3 can be made simple or more complex presets. The above parameters is added: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A play area: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;From Key &#039;&#039;&#039;  and Key To allow you to select the range of action, we define KEY From notes by clicking on the displayed value and then play the keyboard the desired note (the number will be displayed.). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
We define Key To note (which may not be less than From Key) by clicking on the &lt;br /&gt;
displayed value and then play the keyboard the desired note (which may not be less than From Key). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Particular velocity: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Velocity FROM &#039;&#039;&#039; Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will be generated. A low value corresponds to &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; the maximum is &amp;quot;Sforzando.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Velocity To&#039;&#039;&#039; Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will no longer generated. This value can not be less than Velocity FROM. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A change octave. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A transposition in semitones. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These special lanes and 2nd RIGHT and LEFT VOICE allow for example to produce a different tone and a different velocity according to the octave played&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig67.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The parameters are set you can save your work in SAVE SOUND &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Distinctive Ways &#039;&#039;&#039;DRUM&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;PERC&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By double-clicking on the track or PERC DRUM SOUND EDIT window appears with new &lt;br /&gt;
percussion own settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig68.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These two channels have a DRUM MIXER &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Particulars of the Track &#039;&#039;&#039;BASS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ability to save the MANUAL BASS SUSTAIN. To do this, select Manual Bass, double click on the bass track, and change the value of the ReleaseTime. You can then save this setting in CONFIG SAVE STARTUP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SAVE SOUND ==&lt;br /&gt;
SAVE RIGHT SOUND is available from the button [[File:Fig68a.jpg | 120px]]&lt;br /&gt;
and &amp;quot;SOUND ...&amp;quot; The following parameters are stored in SAVE RIGHT SOUND: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle9.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By combining up to 5 tracks (RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4 and 2nd VOICE) it is easy to create new sounds complex. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== CONTEXT MENU TRACK ==&lt;br /&gt;
Right click on a track displays a context menu thatcallows the following selections: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Here, right click ACCOMP4:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig69.jpg | 360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===  SEND TO MIDI ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  menu  allows  you  to  route  MIDI  track  this  information  to  multiple  MIDI  outputs,  these &lt;br /&gt;
choices are not mutually exclusive. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : It is possible to use multiple MIDI interfaces with the same names of MIDI ports.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SOUND EDIT ...  ===&lt;br /&gt;
See Section 5.10.2 SOUND EDIT &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== STYLE MIXER ... ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  command  displays  summary  screen  settings  current  style  for  each  track,  and  each &lt;br /&gt;
variation. (Compatibility Ketron styles to come)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig70.jpg |780| center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== GROUP MASTER/EFFECTS ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig71.jpg |240| center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This group has 4 channels and adjustment effects two groups: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The first track named &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG, we read a sequence or an audio file, or STYLE &#039;&#039;&#039; for the use of a &lt;br /&gt;
style rule by moving the cursor vertical level of the sequence, or the audio file type (0-127) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The second channel named [[File:Fig71b.jpg | 40px ]] adjusted by means of the vertical level of the cursor LEFT section (0 to 127). This path can be selected, which causes the display option [[File:Fig71c.jpg | 90px ]] in VOICE. This feature allows you to associate a bar SOUNDS MY STYLE. A right-click displays &lt;br /&gt;
the popup menu cf. 5.10.4. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  third  path  named in [[File:Fig71d.jpg | 50px ]] adjusted  by  means  of  the  vertical  level  of  the  cursor  RIGHT section (0 to 127). This path can be selected, which causes the column display stamps allowing choice. A right-click displays the popup menu cf. 5.10.4. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth track named  MAST rule acting on the vertical [[File:Fig71e.jpg | 50px ]] rule acting on the vertical slider overall output  level (MASTER) from 0 to 127.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Above, another digital indicator shows white numerals on a black background, it is of polyphony, &lt;br /&gt;
in other words, the number of notes &amp;quot;ON&amp;quot; sent to the sound module. This allows for example, &lt;br /&gt;
whether &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; is receiving MIDI data from the device connected to MIDI IN. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  first  group  of  effects  named  FX1-REVERB  can  select  a  reverb  type  from  eight  types  of &lt;br /&gt;
which OFF (no reverb). The choice is made by clicking on the name of the REVERB in use, a &lt;br /&gt;
drop-down list displays the different reverbs available. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By  clicking  on  the  bottom  of  the  window &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It  clears  the  combo  box  without  applying  the &lt;br /&gt;
changes. &lt;br /&gt;
The maximum level is adjustable reverb chosen in another drop-down list of values: 0 to 16. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The second effect group named FX2 can choose different types of CHORUS DELAY DISTO to &lt;br /&gt;
be applied to different tracks &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Eight different types are available including an  OFF for all &lt;br /&gt;
three FX2 effects. By clicking on the bottom of thewindow &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It clears the combo box without &lt;br /&gt;
applying the changes. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.10._MIXER&amp;diff=490</id>
		<title>5.10. MIXER</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.10._MIXER&amp;diff=490"/>
		<updated>2015-12-18T15:53:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* THE VOICE PANEL */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== The VOICE Panel ==&lt;br /&gt;
This group has 16 voices, each voice can be either on a runway or arranger on a track MIDI or KAR read file.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Please add +1 to all &amp;quot;Channel MIDI&amp;quot; in left column&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Example: RIGHT1 is MIDI Channel 13&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle7.jpg | 480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig65.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle8.jpg | 640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle8a.jpg | 640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==  SECTION SOUND EDIT ==&lt;br /&gt;
Double-click on one of 16 tracks opens the SOUND EDIT window. Once the open window, a single click on other tracks, update the SOUND EDITwindow. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig66.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When editing tracks RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4 and 2nd VOICE LEFT and 1, 2, 3 can be made simple or more complex presets. The above parameters is added: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A play area: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;From Key &#039;&#039;&#039;  and Key To allow you to select the range of action, we define KEY From notes by clicking on the displayed value and then play the keyboard the desired note (the number will be displayed.). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
We define Key To note (which may not be less than From Key) by clicking on the &lt;br /&gt;
displayed value and then play the keyboard the desired note (which may not be less than From Key). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Particular velocity: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Velocity FROM &#039;&#039;&#039; Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will be generated. A low value corresponds to &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; the maximum is &amp;quot;Sforzando.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Velocity To&#039;&#039;&#039; Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will no longer generated. This value can not be less than Velocity FROM. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A change octave. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A transposition in semitones. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These special lanes and 2nd RIGHT and LEFT VOICE allow for example to produce a different tone and a different velocity according to the octave played&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig67.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The parameters are set you can save your work in SAVE SOUND &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Distinctive Ways &#039;&#039;&#039;DRUM&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;PERC&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By double-clicking on the track or PERC DRUM SOUND EDIT window appears with new &lt;br /&gt;
percussion own settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig68.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These two channels have a DRUM MIXER &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Particulars of the Track &#039;&#039;&#039;BASS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ability to save the MANUAL BASS SUSTAIN. To do this, select Manual Bass, double click on the bass track, and change the value of the ReleaseTime. You can then save this setting in CONFIG SAVE STARTUP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SAVE SOUND ==&lt;br /&gt;
SAVE RIGHT SOUND is available from the button [[File:Fig68a.jpg | 120px]]&lt;br /&gt;
and &amp;quot;SOUND ...&amp;quot; The following parameters are stored in SAVE RIGHT SOUND: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle9.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By combining up to 5 tracks (RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4 and 2nd VOICE) it is easy to create new sounds complex. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== CONTEXT MENU TRACK ==&lt;br /&gt;
Right click on a track displays a context menu thatcallows the following selections: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Here, right click ACCOMP4:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig69.jpg | 360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===  SEND TO MIDI ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  menu  allows  you  to  route  MIDI  track  this  information  to  multiple  MIDI  outputs,  these &lt;br /&gt;
choices are not mutually exclusive. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : It is possible to use multiple MIDI interfaces with the same names of MIDI ports.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SOUND EDIT ...  ===&lt;br /&gt;
See Section 5.10.2 SOUND EDIT &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== STYLE MIXER ... ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  command  displays  summary  screen  settings  current  style  for  each  track,  and  each &lt;br /&gt;
variation. (Compatibility Ketron styles to come)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig70.jpg |780| center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== GROUP MASTER/EFFECTS ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig71.jpg |240| center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This group has 4 channels and adjustment effects two groups: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The first track named &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG, we read a sequence or an audio file, or STYLE &#039;&#039;&#039; for the use of a &lt;br /&gt;
style rule by moving the cursor vertical level of the sequence, or the audio file type (0-127) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The second channel named [[File:Fig71b.jpg | 40px ]] adjusted by means of the vertical level of the cursor LEFT section (0 to 127). This path can be selected, which causes the display option [[File:Fig71c.jpg | 90px ]] in VOICE. This feature allows you to associate a bar SOUNDS MY STYLE. A right-click displays &lt;br /&gt;
the popup menu cf. 5.10.4. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  third  path  named in [[File:Fig71d.jpg | 50px ]] adjusted  by  means  of  the  vertical  level  of  the  cursor  RIGHT section (0 to 127). This path can be selected, which causes the column display stamps allowing choice. A right-click displays the popup menu cf. 5.10.4. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth track named  MAST rule acting on the vertical [[File:Fig71e.jpg | 50px ]] rule acting on the vertical slider overall output  level (MASTER) from 0 to 127.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Above, another digital indicator shows white numerals on a black background, it is of polyphony, &lt;br /&gt;
in other words, the number of notes &amp;quot;ON&amp;quot; sent to the sound module. This allows for example, &lt;br /&gt;
whether &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; is receiving MIDI data from the device connected to MIDI IN. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  first  group  of  effects  named  FX1-REVERB  can  select  a  reverb  type  from  eight  types  of &lt;br /&gt;
which OFF (no reverb). The choice is made by clicking on the name of the REVERB in use, a &lt;br /&gt;
drop-down list displays the different reverbs available. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By  clicking  on  the  bottom  of  the  window &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It  clears  the  combo  box  without  applying  the &lt;br /&gt;
changes. &lt;br /&gt;
The maximum level is adjustable reverb chosen in another drop-down list of values: 0 to 16. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The second effect group named FX2 can choose different types of CHORUS DELAY DISTO to &lt;br /&gt;
be applied to different tracks &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Eight different types are available including an  OFF for all &lt;br /&gt;
three FX2 effects. By clicking on the bottom of thewindow &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It clears the combo box without &lt;br /&gt;
applying the changes. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.10._MIXER&amp;diff=489</id>
		<title>5.10. MIXER</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.10._MIXER&amp;diff=489"/>
		<updated>2015-12-18T15:53:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* GROUP VOICE */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== THE VOICE PANEL ==&lt;br /&gt;
This group has 16 voices, each voice can be either on a runway or arranger on a track MIDI or KAR read file.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Please add +1 to all &amp;quot;Channel MIDI&amp;quot; in left column&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Example: RIGHT1 is MIDI Channel 13&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle7.jpg | 480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig65.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle8.jpg | 640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle8a.jpg | 640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==  SECTION SOUND EDIT ==&lt;br /&gt;
Double-click on one of 16 tracks opens the SOUND EDIT window. Once the open window, a single click on other tracks, update the SOUND EDITwindow. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig66.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When editing tracks RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4 and 2nd VOICE LEFT and 1, 2, 3 can be made simple or more complex presets. The above parameters is added: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A play area: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;From Key &#039;&#039;&#039;  and Key To allow you to select the range of action, we define KEY From notes by clicking on the displayed value and then play the keyboard the desired note (the number will be displayed.). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
We define Key To note (which may not be less than From Key) by clicking on the &lt;br /&gt;
displayed value and then play the keyboard the desired note (which may not be less than From Key). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Particular velocity: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Velocity FROM &#039;&#039;&#039; Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will be generated. A low value corresponds to &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; the maximum is &amp;quot;Sforzando.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Velocity To&#039;&#039;&#039; Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will no longer generated. This value can not be less than Velocity FROM. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A change octave. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A transposition in semitones. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These special lanes and 2nd RIGHT and LEFT VOICE allow for example to produce a different tone and a different velocity according to the octave played&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig67.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The parameters are set you can save your work in SAVE SOUND &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Distinctive Ways &#039;&#039;&#039;DRUM&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;PERC&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By double-clicking on the track or PERC DRUM SOUND EDIT window appears with new &lt;br /&gt;
percussion own settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig68.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These two channels have a DRUM MIXER &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Particulars of the Track &#039;&#039;&#039;BASS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ability to save the MANUAL BASS SUSTAIN. To do this, select Manual Bass, double click on the bass track, and change the value of the ReleaseTime. You can then save this setting in CONFIG SAVE STARTUP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SAVE SOUND ==&lt;br /&gt;
SAVE RIGHT SOUND is available from the button [[File:Fig68a.jpg | 120px]]&lt;br /&gt;
and &amp;quot;SOUND ...&amp;quot; The following parameters are stored in SAVE RIGHT SOUND: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle9.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By combining up to 5 tracks (RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4 and 2nd VOICE) it is easy to create new sounds complex. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== CONTEXT MENU TRACK ==&lt;br /&gt;
Right click on a track displays a context menu thatcallows the following selections: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Here, right click ACCOMP4:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig69.jpg | 360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===  SEND TO MIDI ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  menu  allows  you  to  route  MIDI  track  this  information  to  multiple  MIDI  outputs,  these &lt;br /&gt;
choices are not mutually exclusive. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : It is possible to use multiple MIDI interfaces with the same names of MIDI ports.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SOUND EDIT ...  ===&lt;br /&gt;
See Section 5.10.2 SOUND EDIT &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== STYLE MIXER ... ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  command  displays  summary  screen  settings  current  style  for  each  track,  and  each &lt;br /&gt;
variation. (Compatibility Ketron styles to come)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig70.jpg |780| center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== GROUP MASTER/EFFECTS ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig71.jpg |240| center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This group has 4 channels and adjustment effects two groups: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The first track named &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG, we read a sequence or an audio file, or STYLE &#039;&#039;&#039; for the use of a &lt;br /&gt;
style rule by moving the cursor vertical level of the sequence, or the audio file type (0-127) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The second channel named [[File:Fig71b.jpg | 40px ]] adjusted by means of the vertical level of the cursor LEFT section (0 to 127). This path can be selected, which causes the display option [[File:Fig71c.jpg | 90px ]] in VOICE. This feature allows you to associate a bar SOUNDS MY STYLE. A right-click displays &lt;br /&gt;
the popup menu cf. 5.10.4. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  third  path  named in [[File:Fig71d.jpg | 50px ]] adjusted  by  means  of  the  vertical  level  of  the  cursor  RIGHT section (0 to 127). This path can be selected, which causes the column display stamps allowing choice. A right-click displays the popup menu cf. 5.10.4. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth track named  MAST rule acting on the vertical [[File:Fig71e.jpg | 50px ]] rule acting on the vertical slider overall output  level (MASTER) from 0 to 127.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Above, another digital indicator shows white numerals on a black background, it is of polyphony, &lt;br /&gt;
in other words, the number of notes &amp;quot;ON&amp;quot; sent to the sound module. This allows for example, &lt;br /&gt;
whether &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; is receiving MIDI data from the device connected to MIDI IN. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  first  group  of  effects  named  FX1-REVERB  can  select  a  reverb  type  from  eight  types  of &lt;br /&gt;
which OFF (no reverb). The choice is made by clicking on the name of the REVERB in use, a &lt;br /&gt;
drop-down list displays the different reverbs available. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By  clicking  on  the  bottom  of  the  window &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It  clears  the  combo  box  without  applying  the &lt;br /&gt;
changes. &lt;br /&gt;
The maximum level is adjustable reverb chosen in another drop-down list of values: 0 to 16. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The second effect group named FX2 can choose different types of CHORUS DELAY DISTO to &lt;br /&gt;
be applied to different tracks &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Eight different types are available including an  OFF for all &lt;br /&gt;
three FX2 effects. By clicking on the bottom of thewindow &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It clears the combo box without &lt;br /&gt;
applying the changes. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.1._WINDOWS_PROGRAM&amp;diff=488</id>
		<title>5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.1._WINDOWS_PROGRAM&amp;diff=488"/>
		<updated>2015-12-18T15:49:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* ICONS REDUCTION / CLOSE */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== OPTIONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig2.jpg  |640px  ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This window (Fig3) shows the available options for the vA2. It allows to configure midi ports, controllers, song chords,Master, Arabic scale. The effects is only available in the yamaha mode. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig3.jpg  |280px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MIDI PORTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  window  allows  you  to  choose  or  MIDI  interfaces that  will  be  active  in  IN  and  OUT from &lt;br /&gt;
those connected to the computer. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle1.jpg |640px  | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Provided that the MIDI interface is provided with several MIDI IN input. &lt;br /&gt;
KEYBOARD MODE: By default &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL &lt;br /&gt;
1 (Fig. 4) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selectingMIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible &lt;br /&gt;
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right),the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and &lt;br /&gt;
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI LED FEEDBACK&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
Some MIDI controllers such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2have buttons that can illuminate, &lt;br /&gt;
these lights can beings controlled via MIDI.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;VIDEO:&#039;&#039;&#039;   http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE&lt;br /&gt;
This option gives you a visual acknowledgment without having to look at the computer screen. &lt;br /&gt;
For example, we assign 4 buttons variations ABCD arranger, button change during turns. &lt;br /&gt;
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS. &lt;br /&gt;
In the figure below is selected in the MIDI controller MIDI IN 2nd by checking the LED feedback &lt;br /&gt;
box this MIDI (Fig. 6) entrance, you can choose theMIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for &lt;br /&gt;
the  KORG  nanoKONTROL2  the  KORG  Kontrol  Editor  program  (available  on  the  website &lt;br /&gt;
KORG) and select is used:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
- CONTROL MODE = CC &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Similarly, for each button, choose: &lt;br /&gt;
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication,Write Scene Data.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI OUT:&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module. &lt;br /&gt;
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and &lt;br /&gt;
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4 &lt;br /&gt;
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.&lt;br /&gt;
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers. &lt;br /&gt;
GM2  mode  is  recommended  in  all  other  cases,  such  as the  Hypersonic  2  VST  or  other  GM compatible VST.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SYNCRO OUT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so he agrees to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
With this option &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; can play in rhythm with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer, drum machine, etc.. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If  you  do  not  use  this  function,  it  is  advisable  to leave  unchecked  the  box,  because  it  sends continuous MIDI messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; By selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3. &lt;br /&gt;
This option allows for example to double the polyphony of sound modules Ketron adding other modules. &lt;br /&gt;
START button to confirm the settings during initialinstallation or change thereafter.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== CONTROLLERS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This window allows you to manage the behavior of &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; against external controls, they are: &lt;br /&gt;
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To  assign  a  function  to  an  external  controller,  we  choose  first  the  desired  among  those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button.  All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example:&#039;&#039;&#039; Here, various functions &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC  keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At  the  bottom  of  the  window  CONTROLLERS  (OPTIONS  /, scroll  MIDI  events  entering &lt;br /&gt;
vArranger  (outside  of  active  sensing  messages  and  midi  clock).  This  can  be  useful  to  know  what instruments and MIDI controllers send.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SONG CHORDS ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORDS 2 in 1 function that allows you to:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Creating chordsheet&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS, &lt;br /&gt;
SONG CHORDS. It then enters the chord grid of the song on the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on a measure, we enter the agreement for the selected time. &lt;br /&gt;
By  clicking  on  the  upper  part  of  the  measure,  one  can  select  a  variation  from  those  of  the current  style  (ABCD Main,  Fill,  Intro,  Ending.).  For  a  given  and for  each  of  its  sections  style, duration in number of measurements is shown in brackets. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once  you  click  on  the  time  of  the  measurement,  the  agreements  between  the  mouse,  or  by playing a MIDI instrument or by typing the letters on the keys ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the &#039;&#039;&#039;MENU CONTROLLERS&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once the chord grid input &#039;&#039;&#039;PLAY SONG can listen the full accompaniment created. It is &lt;br /&gt;
also possible to implement the SONG CHORDS by semitone without re-entering &lt;br /&gt;
data, simply by acting on TRANSPOSE + or -&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Right-click in a time of one measurement opens the following pop-up window:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From this window you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Insert [INSERT] one or more steps (4 steps in the example above) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select from this measurement [SELECT FROM -&amp;gt;] untilthe other measure [&amp;lt;-TO SELECT] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select All [SELECT ALL] and &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Deselect all [DESELECT ALL] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Copy selection [COPY] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Paste Selection [PASTE] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Paste the selection several times [PASTE &#039;?&#039; TIMES]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Remove selection [DELETE], or measure if no selection&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Clear information in the selection [CLEAR], or to the extent if no selection &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Transpose only selected measures [TRANSPOSE-TRANSPOSE +] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Play SONG CHORDS for this measurement [PLAY FROM HERE] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for thismeasurement, the time during the game is the salmon color as below in 3/4 time: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Some actions are validated by a confirmation message like this: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The insertion of data as 24 extends the edit windowup to 48 steps and so on. &lt;br /&gt;
The SAVE button in the SONG SONG SONG CHORDS launches SAVE window with SONG &lt;br /&gt;
CHORDS box already checked! &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to create midi accompaniments very quickly and easily by clicking on EXPORT TO MIDIFILE to generate the MIDI file, it is possible to open it in any professional MIDI sequencer, and from this base to simplify work: add VST audio tracks of ... and burn your CD.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;The vRIFF function:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
The new function  &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORDS can be used in another manière.On some  agreements between the SONG CHORD window. For example: C Am F  G. .. then closes the window: Launch&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;  (START) and play some chords. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Above the four variations of the style (Main ABCD)  There is a button called  &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF. Clicking it changes  color  and  hear  the  now  controlled  by  the  series  of  agreements  previously returned accompaniment.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button: &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : Right click on the button shows vRIFF SONG CHORDSediting window. &lt;br /&gt;
Pianists  now  have  both  hands  free  to  play  other  things,  and  the  left  hand  does  not  control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF cheek&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Can  regain  control  of  the  fix  to  ANY  TIME  by  clicking  on  the  button  &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF,  or  until  the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF thenresumes its gray).&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should  be  noted  that  the  instructions  SONG  CHORD  have  priority  in  case  of  simultaneous orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu. &lt;br /&gt;
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Features&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; :&lt;br /&gt;
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once  the  chord  grid  entry,  you  can  try  other  styles on  the  same  grid  by  pressing  the  button vRIFF. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MIDI EVENTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== MASTER ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;BASS  BOOST : &#039;&#039;&#039; Adjusts  the equalizer  by  selecting  the  correct frequency  and  gain.  Asterisks &lt;br /&gt;
indicate default values. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI INPUT GAIN: &#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of &lt;br /&gt;
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to &lt;br /&gt;
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to &lt;br /&gt;
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument, &lt;br /&gt;
if the permits. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MY SD2/SD4 Freezes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once &lt;br /&gt;
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : This option is checked by default, appears if a  SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT &lt;br /&gt;
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If  your  SD2  does  not  crash  when  reading  &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;midi  test-it &amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;  is  better  to  shoot  and  all  the  midi messages are sent. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;CHORD  RECOGNITION  THRESHOLD  VELOCITY : &#039;&#039;&#039; Ability  to  filter  the  notes  low  intensity  to avoid unwanted chord changes. This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists because unwanted &lt;br /&gt;
notes  are  easily  sent  by  open  strings  touched. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== EFFECTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== ARABIC SCALE ===&lt;br /&gt;
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original &lt;br /&gt;
intonation. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;NB&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;:  To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==  MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
On the top bar of the main window, there are three icons, each representing one of the three MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== vARRANGER ² ==&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== PANIC ==&lt;br /&gt;
This red button sends the command  &amp;quot;ALL NOTES OFF&amp;quot; on all MIDI channels, with the intention to stop all sound.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note that if the problem involves, for example, a disconnected MIDI cable, then the message can&#039;t arrive and any previously played notes will remain audible.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== TIME ==&lt;br /&gt;
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== MINIMIZE AND CLOSE ICONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
These are located at the right-hand end of the top-bar and work like the usual Windows minimize and close icons. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A click on the minimize button of the window also momentarily frees keys assigned to PC keyboard for &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, in CONTROLLERS, you can assign the &amp;quot;reduce&amp;quot; the PC Escape (Esc) key.&lt;br /&gt;
Then, a first press of the &amp;quot;Esc&amp;quot; key will minimize the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; window, the second press restores the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; window to the screen. Double-click the wallpaper brings the window &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; from normal to full screen and vice versa.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When in the normal mode mode, you can also move and resize the window in the usual way.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.1._WINDOWS_PROGRAM&amp;diff=487</id>
		<title>5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.1._WINDOWS_PROGRAM&amp;diff=487"/>
		<updated>2015-12-18T15:37:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* PANIC */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== OPTIONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig2.jpg  |640px  ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This window (Fig3) shows the available options for the vA2. It allows to configure midi ports, controllers, song chords,Master, Arabic scale. The effects is only available in the yamaha mode. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig3.jpg  |280px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MIDI PORTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  window  allows  you  to  choose  or  MIDI  interfaces that  will  be  active  in  IN  and  OUT from &lt;br /&gt;
those connected to the computer. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle1.jpg |640px  | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Provided that the MIDI interface is provided with several MIDI IN input. &lt;br /&gt;
KEYBOARD MODE: By default &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL &lt;br /&gt;
1 (Fig. 4) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selectingMIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible &lt;br /&gt;
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right),the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and &lt;br /&gt;
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI LED FEEDBACK&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
Some MIDI controllers such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2have buttons that can illuminate, &lt;br /&gt;
these lights can beings controlled via MIDI.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;VIDEO:&#039;&#039;&#039;   http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE&lt;br /&gt;
This option gives you a visual acknowledgment without having to look at the computer screen. &lt;br /&gt;
For example, we assign 4 buttons variations ABCD arranger, button change during turns. &lt;br /&gt;
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS. &lt;br /&gt;
In the figure below is selected in the MIDI controller MIDI IN 2nd by checking the LED feedback &lt;br /&gt;
box this MIDI (Fig. 6) entrance, you can choose theMIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for &lt;br /&gt;
the  KORG  nanoKONTROL2  the  KORG  Kontrol  Editor  program  (available  on  the  website &lt;br /&gt;
KORG) and select is used:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
- CONTROL MODE = CC &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Similarly, for each button, choose: &lt;br /&gt;
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication,Write Scene Data.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI OUT:&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module. &lt;br /&gt;
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and &lt;br /&gt;
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4 &lt;br /&gt;
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.&lt;br /&gt;
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers. &lt;br /&gt;
GM2  mode  is  recommended  in  all  other  cases,  such  as the  Hypersonic  2  VST  or  other  GM compatible VST.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SYNCRO OUT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so he agrees to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
With this option &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; can play in rhythm with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer, drum machine, etc.. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If  you  do  not  use  this  function,  it  is  advisable  to leave  unchecked  the  box,  because  it  sends continuous MIDI messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; By selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3. &lt;br /&gt;
This option allows for example to double the polyphony of sound modules Ketron adding other modules. &lt;br /&gt;
START button to confirm the settings during initialinstallation or change thereafter.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== CONTROLLERS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This window allows you to manage the behavior of &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; against external controls, they are: &lt;br /&gt;
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To  assign  a  function  to  an  external  controller,  we  choose  first  the  desired  among  those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button.  All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example:&#039;&#039;&#039; Here, various functions &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC  keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At  the  bottom  of  the  window  CONTROLLERS  (OPTIONS  /, scroll  MIDI  events  entering &lt;br /&gt;
vArranger  (outside  of  active  sensing  messages  and  midi  clock).  This  can  be  useful  to  know  what instruments and MIDI controllers send.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SONG CHORDS ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORDS 2 in 1 function that allows you to:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Creating chordsheet&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS, &lt;br /&gt;
SONG CHORDS. It then enters the chord grid of the song on the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on a measure, we enter the agreement for the selected time. &lt;br /&gt;
By  clicking  on  the  upper  part  of  the  measure,  one  can  select  a  variation  from  those  of  the current  style  (ABCD Main,  Fill,  Intro,  Ending.).  For  a  given  and for  each  of  its  sections  style, duration in number of measurements is shown in brackets. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once  you  click  on  the  time  of  the  measurement,  the  agreements  between  the  mouse,  or  by playing a MIDI instrument or by typing the letters on the keys ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the &#039;&#039;&#039;MENU CONTROLLERS&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once the chord grid input &#039;&#039;&#039;PLAY SONG can listen the full accompaniment created. It is &lt;br /&gt;
also possible to implement the SONG CHORDS by semitone without re-entering &lt;br /&gt;
data, simply by acting on TRANSPOSE + or -&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Right-click in a time of one measurement opens the following pop-up window:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From this window you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Insert [INSERT] one or more steps (4 steps in the example above) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select from this measurement [SELECT FROM -&amp;gt;] untilthe other measure [&amp;lt;-TO SELECT] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select All [SELECT ALL] and &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Deselect all [DESELECT ALL] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Copy selection [COPY] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Paste Selection [PASTE] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Paste the selection several times [PASTE &#039;?&#039; TIMES]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Remove selection [DELETE], or measure if no selection&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Clear information in the selection [CLEAR], or to the extent if no selection &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Transpose only selected measures [TRANSPOSE-TRANSPOSE +] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Play SONG CHORDS for this measurement [PLAY FROM HERE] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for thismeasurement, the time during the game is the salmon color as below in 3/4 time: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Some actions are validated by a confirmation message like this: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The insertion of data as 24 extends the edit windowup to 48 steps and so on. &lt;br /&gt;
The SAVE button in the SONG SONG SONG CHORDS launches SAVE window with SONG &lt;br /&gt;
CHORDS box already checked! &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to create midi accompaniments very quickly and easily by clicking on EXPORT TO MIDIFILE to generate the MIDI file, it is possible to open it in any professional MIDI sequencer, and from this base to simplify work: add VST audio tracks of ... and burn your CD.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;The vRIFF function:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
The new function  &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORDS can be used in another manière.On some  agreements between the SONG CHORD window. For example: C Am F  G. .. then closes the window: Launch&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;  (START) and play some chords. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Above the four variations of the style (Main ABCD)  There is a button called  &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF. Clicking it changes  color  and  hear  the  now  controlled  by  the  series  of  agreements  previously returned accompaniment.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button: &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : Right click on the button shows vRIFF SONG CHORDSediting window. &lt;br /&gt;
Pianists  now  have  both  hands  free  to  play  other  things,  and  the  left  hand  does  not  control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF cheek&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Can  regain  control  of  the  fix  to  ANY  TIME  by  clicking  on  the  button  &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF,  or  until  the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF thenresumes its gray).&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should  be  noted  that  the  instructions  SONG  CHORD  have  priority  in  case  of  simultaneous orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu. &lt;br /&gt;
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Features&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; :&lt;br /&gt;
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once  the  chord  grid  entry,  you  can  try  other  styles on  the  same  grid  by  pressing  the  button vRIFF. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MIDI EVENTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== MASTER ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;BASS  BOOST : &#039;&#039;&#039; Adjusts  the equalizer  by  selecting  the  correct frequency  and  gain.  Asterisks &lt;br /&gt;
indicate default values. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI INPUT GAIN: &#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of &lt;br /&gt;
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to &lt;br /&gt;
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to &lt;br /&gt;
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument, &lt;br /&gt;
if the permits. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MY SD2/SD4 Freezes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once &lt;br /&gt;
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : This option is checked by default, appears if a  SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT &lt;br /&gt;
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If  your  SD2  does  not  crash  when  reading  &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;midi  test-it &amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;  is  better  to  shoot  and  all  the  midi messages are sent. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;CHORD  RECOGNITION  THRESHOLD  VELOCITY : &#039;&#039;&#039; Ability  to  filter  the  notes  low  intensity  to avoid unwanted chord changes. This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists because unwanted &lt;br /&gt;
notes  are  easily  sent  by  open  strings  touched. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== EFFECTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== ARABIC SCALE ===&lt;br /&gt;
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original &lt;br /&gt;
intonation. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;NB&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;:  To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==  MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
On the top bar of the main window, there are three icons, each representing one of the three MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== vARRANGER ² ==&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== PANIC ==&lt;br /&gt;
This red button sends the command  &amp;quot;ALL NOTES OFF&amp;quot; on all MIDI channels, with the intention to stop all sound.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note that if the problem involves, for example, a disconnected MIDI cable, then the message can&#039;t arrive and any previously played notes will remain audible.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== TIME ==&lt;br /&gt;
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== ICONS REDUCTION / CLOSE ==&lt;br /&gt;
Works like icons reduction Windows window. &lt;br /&gt;
A click on the minimize button of the window also frees momentarily keys assigned to PC &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; For example, it is advisable, in CONTROLLERS, assign the &amp;quot;reduce&amp;quot; the PC Escape (Esc) key &lt;br /&gt;
function. &lt;br /&gt;
Thus, a first pressing &amp;quot;Esc&amp;quot; reduced the window, the second support vA2 returns to the screen. Double-click the wallpaper brings the window &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; from normal to full screen and vice versa. In Normal mode, you can also move and resize the window&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.1._WINDOWS_PROGRAM&amp;diff=486</id>
		<title>5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.1._WINDOWS_PROGRAM&amp;diff=486"/>
		<updated>2015-12-18T15:36:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* PANIC */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== OPTIONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig2.jpg  |640px  ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This window (Fig3) shows the available options for the vA2. It allows to configure midi ports, controllers, song chords,Master, Arabic scale. The effects is only available in the yamaha mode. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig3.jpg  |280px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MIDI PORTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  window  allows  you  to  choose  or  MIDI  interfaces that  will  be  active  in  IN  and  OUT from &lt;br /&gt;
those connected to the computer. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle1.jpg |640px  | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Provided that the MIDI interface is provided with several MIDI IN input. &lt;br /&gt;
KEYBOARD MODE: By default &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL &lt;br /&gt;
1 (Fig. 4) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selectingMIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible &lt;br /&gt;
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right),the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and &lt;br /&gt;
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI LED FEEDBACK&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
Some MIDI controllers such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2have buttons that can illuminate, &lt;br /&gt;
these lights can beings controlled via MIDI.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;VIDEO:&#039;&#039;&#039;   http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE&lt;br /&gt;
This option gives you a visual acknowledgment without having to look at the computer screen. &lt;br /&gt;
For example, we assign 4 buttons variations ABCD arranger, button change during turns. &lt;br /&gt;
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS. &lt;br /&gt;
In the figure below is selected in the MIDI controller MIDI IN 2nd by checking the LED feedback &lt;br /&gt;
box this MIDI (Fig. 6) entrance, you can choose theMIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for &lt;br /&gt;
the  KORG  nanoKONTROL2  the  KORG  Kontrol  Editor  program  (available  on  the  website &lt;br /&gt;
KORG) and select is used:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
- CONTROL MODE = CC &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Similarly, for each button, choose: &lt;br /&gt;
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication,Write Scene Data.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI OUT:&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module. &lt;br /&gt;
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and &lt;br /&gt;
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4 &lt;br /&gt;
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.&lt;br /&gt;
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers. &lt;br /&gt;
GM2  mode  is  recommended  in  all  other  cases,  such  as the  Hypersonic  2  VST  or  other  GM compatible VST.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SYNCRO OUT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so he agrees to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
With this option &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; can play in rhythm with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer, drum machine, etc.. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If  you  do  not  use  this  function,  it  is  advisable  to leave  unchecked  the  box,  because  it  sends continuous MIDI messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; By selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3. &lt;br /&gt;
This option allows for example to double the polyphony of sound modules Ketron adding other modules. &lt;br /&gt;
START button to confirm the settings during initialinstallation or change thereafter.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== CONTROLLERS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This window allows you to manage the behavior of &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; against external controls, they are: &lt;br /&gt;
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To  assign  a  function  to  an  external  controller,  we  choose  first  the  desired  among  those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button.  All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example:&#039;&#039;&#039; Here, various functions &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC  keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At  the  bottom  of  the  window  CONTROLLERS  (OPTIONS  /, scroll  MIDI  events  entering &lt;br /&gt;
vArranger  (outside  of  active  sensing  messages  and  midi  clock).  This  can  be  useful  to  know  what instruments and MIDI controllers send.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SONG CHORDS ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORDS 2 in 1 function that allows you to:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Creating chordsheet&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS, &lt;br /&gt;
SONG CHORDS. It then enters the chord grid of the song on the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on a measure, we enter the agreement for the selected time. &lt;br /&gt;
By  clicking  on  the  upper  part  of  the  measure,  one  can  select  a  variation  from  those  of  the current  style  (ABCD Main,  Fill,  Intro,  Ending.).  For  a  given  and for  each  of  its  sections  style, duration in number of measurements is shown in brackets. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once  you  click  on  the  time  of  the  measurement,  the  agreements  between  the  mouse,  or  by playing a MIDI instrument or by typing the letters on the keys ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the &#039;&#039;&#039;MENU CONTROLLERS&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once the chord grid input &#039;&#039;&#039;PLAY SONG can listen the full accompaniment created. It is &lt;br /&gt;
also possible to implement the SONG CHORDS by semitone without re-entering &lt;br /&gt;
data, simply by acting on TRANSPOSE + or -&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Right-click in a time of one measurement opens the following pop-up window:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From this window you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Insert [INSERT] one or more steps (4 steps in the example above) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select from this measurement [SELECT FROM -&amp;gt;] untilthe other measure [&amp;lt;-TO SELECT] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select All [SELECT ALL] and &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Deselect all [DESELECT ALL] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Copy selection [COPY] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Paste Selection [PASTE] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Paste the selection several times [PASTE &#039;?&#039; TIMES]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Remove selection [DELETE], or measure if no selection&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Clear information in the selection [CLEAR], or to the extent if no selection &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Transpose only selected measures [TRANSPOSE-TRANSPOSE +] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Play SONG CHORDS for this measurement [PLAY FROM HERE] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for thismeasurement, the time during the game is the salmon color as below in 3/4 time: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Some actions are validated by a confirmation message like this: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The insertion of data as 24 extends the edit windowup to 48 steps and so on. &lt;br /&gt;
The SAVE button in the SONG SONG SONG CHORDS launches SAVE window with SONG &lt;br /&gt;
CHORDS box already checked! &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to create midi accompaniments very quickly and easily by clicking on EXPORT TO MIDIFILE to generate the MIDI file, it is possible to open it in any professional MIDI sequencer, and from this base to simplify work: add VST audio tracks of ... and burn your CD.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;The vRIFF function:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
The new function  &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORDS can be used in another manière.On some  agreements between the SONG CHORD window. For example: C Am F  G. .. then closes the window: Launch&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;  (START) and play some chords. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Above the four variations of the style (Main ABCD)  There is a button called  &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF. Clicking it changes  color  and  hear  the  now  controlled  by  the  series  of  agreements  previously returned accompaniment.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button: &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : Right click on the button shows vRIFF SONG CHORDSediting window. &lt;br /&gt;
Pianists  now  have  both  hands  free  to  play  other  things,  and  the  left  hand  does  not  control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF cheek&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Can  regain  control  of  the  fix  to  ANY  TIME  by  clicking  on  the  button  &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF,  or  until  the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF thenresumes its gray).&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should  be  noted  that  the  instructions  SONG  CHORD  have  priority  in  case  of  simultaneous orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu. &lt;br /&gt;
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Features&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; :&lt;br /&gt;
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once  the  chord  grid  entry,  you  can  try  other  styles on  the  same  grid  by  pressing  the  button vRIFF. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MIDI EVENTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== MASTER ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;BASS  BOOST : &#039;&#039;&#039; Adjusts  the equalizer  by  selecting  the  correct frequency  and  gain.  Asterisks &lt;br /&gt;
indicate default values. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI INPUT GAIN: &#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of &lt;br /&gt;
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to &lt;br /&gt;
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to &lt;br /&gt;
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument, &lt;br /&gt;
if the permits. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MY SD2/SD4 Freezes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once &lt;br /&gt;
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : This option is checked by default, appears if a  SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT &lt;br /&gt;
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If  your  SD2  does  not  crash  when  reading  &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;midi  test-it &amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;  is  better  to  shoot  and  all  the  midi messages are sent. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;CHORD  RECOGNITION  THRESHOLD  VELOCITY : &#039;&#039;&#039; Ability  to  filter  the  notes  low  intensity  to avoid unwanted chord changes. This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists because unwanted &lt;br /&gt;
notes  are  easily  sent  by  open  strings  touched. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== EFFECTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== ARABIC SCALE ===&lt;br /&gt;
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original &lt;br /&gt;
intonation. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;NB&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;:  To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==  MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
On the top bar of the main window, there are three icons, each representing one of the three MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== vARRANGER ² ==&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== PANIC ==&lt;br /&gt;
This red button sends the command  &amp;quot;ALL NOTES OFF&amp;quot; on all MIDI channels.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If the problem involves, for example, a disconnected MIDI cable, then any previously played notes will remain audible.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== TIME ==&lt;br /&gt;
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== ICONS REDUCTION / CLOSE ==&lt;br /&gt;
Works like icons reduction Windows window. &lt;br /&gt;
A click on the minimize button of the window also frees momentarily keys assigned to PC &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; For example, it is advisable, in CONTROLLERS, assign the &amp;quot;reduce&amp;quot; the PC Escape (Esc) key &lt;br /&gt;
function. &lt;br /&gt;
Thus, a first pressing &amp;quot;Esc&amp;quot; reduced the window, the second support vA2 returns to the screen. Double-click the wallpaper brings the window &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; from normal to full screen and vice versa. In Normal mode, you can also move and resize the window&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.1._WINDOWS_PROGRAM&amp;diff=485</id>
		<title>5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.1._WINDOWS_PROGRAM&amp;diff=485"/>
		<updated>2015-12-18T15:30:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== OPTIONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig2.jpg  |640px  ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This window (Fig3) shows the available options for the vA2. It allows to configure midi ports, controllers, song chords,Master, Arabic scale. The effects is only available in the yamaha mode. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig3.jpg  |280px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MIDI PORTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  window  allows  you  to  choose  or  MIDI  interfaces that  will  be  active  in  IN  and  OUT from &lt;br /&gt;
those connected to the computer. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle1.jpg |640px  | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Provided that the MIDI interface is provided with several MIDI IN input. &lt;br /&gt;
KEYBOARD MODE: By default &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL &lt;br /&gt;
1 (Fig. 4) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selectingMIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible &lt;br /&gt;
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right),the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and &lt;br /&gt;
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI LED FEEDBACK&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
Some MIDI controllers such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2have buttons that can illuminate, &lt;br /&gt;
these lights can beings controlled via MIDI.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;VIDEO:&#039;&#039;&#039;   http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE&lt;br /&gt;
This option gives you a visual acknowledgment without having to look at the computer screen. &lt;br /&gt;
For example, we assign 4 buttons variations ABCD arranger, button change during turns. &lt;br /&gt;
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS. &lt;br /&gt;
In the figure below is selected in the MIDI controller MIDI IN 2nd by checking the LED feedback &lt;br /&gt;
box this MIDI (Fig. 6) entrance, you can choose theMIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for &lt;br /&gt;
the  KORG  nanoKONTROL2  the  KORG  Kontrol  Editor  program  (available  on  the  website &lt;br /&gt;
KORG) and select is used:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
- CONTROL MODE = CC &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Similarly, for each button, choose: &lt;br /&gt;
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication,Write Scene Data.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI OUT:&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module. &lt;br /&gt;
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and &lt;br /&gt;
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4 &lt;br /&gt;
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.&lt;br /&gt;
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers. &lt;br /&gt;
GM2  mode  is  recommended  in  all  other  cases,  such  as the  Hypersonic  2  VST  or  other  GM compatible VST.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SYNCRO OUT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so he agrees to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
With this option &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; can play in rhythm with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer, drum machine, etc.. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If  you  do  not  use  this  function,  it  is  advisable  to leave  unchecked  the  box,  because  it  sends continuous MIDI messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; By selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3. &lt;br /&gt;
This option allows for example to double the polyphony of sound modules Ketron adding other modules. &lt;br /&gt;
START button to confirm the settings during initialinstallation or change thereafter.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== CONTROLLERS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This window allows you to manage the behavior of &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; against external controls, they are: &lt;br /&gt;
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To  assign  a  function  to  an  external  controller,  we  choose  first  the  desired  among  those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button.  All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example:&#039;&#039;&#039; Here, various functions &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC  keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At  the  bottom  of  the  window  CONTROLLERS  (OPTIONS  /, scroll  MIDI  events  entering &lt;br /&gt;
vArranger  (outside  of  active  sensing  messages  and  midi  clock).  This  can  be  useful  to  know  what instruments and MIDI controllers send.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SONG CHORDS ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORDS 2 in 1 function that allows you to:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Creating chordsheet&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS, &lt;br /&gt;
SONG CHORDS. It then enters the chord grid of the song on the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on a measure, we enter the agreement for the selected time. &lt;br /&gt;
By  clicking  on  the  upper  part  of  the  measure,  one  can  select  a  variation  from  those  of  the current  style  (ABCD Main,  Fill,  Intro,  Ending.).  For  a  given  and for  each  of  its  sections  style, duration in number of measurements is shown in brackets. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once  you  click  on  the  time  of  the  measurement,  the  agreements  between  the  mouse,  or  by playing a MIDI instrument or by typing the letters on the keys ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the &#039;&#039;&#039;MENU CONTROLLERS&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once the chord grid input &#039;&#039;&#039;PLAY SONG can listen the full accompaniment created. It is &lt;br /&gt;
also possible to implement the SONG CHORDS by semitone without re-entering &lt;br /&gt;
data, simply by acting on TRANSPOSE + or -&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Right-click in a time of one measurement opens the following pop-up window:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From this window you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Insert [INSERT] one or more steps (4 steps in the example above) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select from this measurement [SELECT FROM -&amp;gt;] untilthe other measure [&amp;lt;-TO SELECT] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select All [SELECT ALL] and &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Deselect all [DESELECT ALL] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Copy selection [COPY] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Paste Selection [PASTE] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Paste the selection several times [PASTE &#039;?&#039; TIMES]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Remove selection [DELETE], or measure if no selection&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Clear information in the selection [CLEAR], or to the extent if no selection &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Transpose only selected measures [TRANSPOSE-TRANSPOSE +] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Play SONG CHORDS for this measurement [PLAY FROM HERE] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for thismeasurement, the time during the game is the salmon color as below in 3/4 time: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Some actions are validated by a confirmation message like this: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The insertion of data as 24 extends the edit windowup to 48 steps and so on. &lt;br /&gt;
The SAVE button in the SONG SONG SONG CHORDS launches SAVE window with SONG &lt;br /&gt;
CHORDS box already checked! &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to create midi accompaniments very quickly and easily by clicking on EXPORT TO MIDIFILE to generate the MIDI file, it is possible to open it in any professional MIDI sequencer, and from this base to simplify work: add VST audio tracks of ... and burn your CD.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;The vRIFF function:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
The new function  &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORDS can be used in another manière.On some  agreements between the SONG CHORD window. For example: C Am F  G. .. then closes the window: Launch&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;  (START) and play some chords. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Above the four variations of the style (Main ABCD)  There is a button called  &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF. Clicking it changes  color  and  hear  the  now  controlled  by  the  series  of  agreements  previously returned accompaniment.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button: &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : Right click on the button shows vRIFF SONG CHORDSediting window. &lt;br /&gt;
Pianists  now  have  both  hands  free  to  play  other  things,  and  the  left  hand  does  not  control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF cheek&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Can  regain  control  of  the  fix  to  ANY  TIME  by  clicking  on  the  button  &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF,  or  until  the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF thenresumes its gray).&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should  be  noted  that  the  instructions  SONG  CHORD  have  priority  in  case  of  simultaneous orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu. &lt;br /&gt;
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Features&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; :&lt;br /&gt;
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once  the  chord  grid  entry,  you  can  try  other  styles on  the  same  grid  by  pressing  the  button vRIFF. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MIDI EVENTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== MASTER ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;BASS  BOOST : &#039;&#039;&#039; Adjusts  the equalizer  by  selecting  the  correct frequency  and  gain.  Asterisks &lt;br /&gt;
indicate default values. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI INPUT GAIN: &#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of &lt;br /&gt;
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to &lt;br /&gt;
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to &lt;br /&gt;
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument, &lt;br /&gt;
if the permits. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MY SD2/SD4 Freezes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once &lt;br /&gt;
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : This option is checked by default, appears if a  SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT &lt;br /&gt;
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If  your  SD2  does  not  crash  when  reading  &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;midi  test-it &amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;  is  better  to  shoot  and  all  the  midi messages are sent. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;CHORD  RECOGNITION  THRESHOLD  VELOCITY : &#039;&#039;&#039; Ability  to  filter  the  notes  low  intensity  to avoid unwanted chord changes. This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists because unwanted &lt;br /&gt;
notes  are  easily  sent  by  open  strings  touched. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== EFFECTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== ARABIC SCALE ===&lt;br /&gt;
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original &lt;br /&gt;
intonation. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;NB&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;:  To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==  MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
On the top bar of the main window, there are three icons, each representing one of the three MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== vARRANGER ² ==&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== PANIC ==&lt;br /&gt;
This red button sends information ALL NOTE OFF on all MIDI channels. He notes that off after a problem as a MIDI cable disconnected, remain audible. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== TIME ==&lt;br /&gt;
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== ICONS REDUCTION / CLOSE ==&lt;br /&gt;
Works like icons reduction Windows window. &lt;br /&gt;
A click on the minimize button of the window also frees momentarily keys assigned to PC &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; For example, it is advisable, in CONTROLLERS, assign the &amp;quot;reduce&amp;quot; the PC Escape (Esc) key &lt;br /&gt;
function. &lt;br /&gt;
Thus, a first pressing &amp;quot;Esc&amp;quot; reduced the window, the second support vA2 returns to the screen. Double-click the wallpaper brings the window &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; from normal to full screen and vice versa. In Normal mode, you can also move and resize the window&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=484</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=484"/>
		<updated>2015-12-18T15:25:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Welcome to the vArranger Online Manual.&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:VAWikiLogo.png]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;        &amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[1. OVERVIEW]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[2. PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION ]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[3. FEATURES]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[4. INSTALLATION ]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[5. FUNCTIONS vA2]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.2. TRANSPOSE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.3. REALTIME DISPLAY]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.4. OCTAVE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.5. BASS]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.6. RIGHT]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.7. VOICE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.8. MY SOUNDS]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.9. MY SONGS]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.10. MIXER]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.11. REALTIME ARRANGER]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.12. STATUS ARRANGER]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[6. ERRORS AND WARNINGS]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[VSTi | 7. USING VST INSTRUMENTS]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[8. CONTACT]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[9. APPENDIX]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
INTRODUCTION&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
This is the online manual of &#039;&#039;&#039;vArranger&#039;&#039;&#039;  - The Virtual Arranger Software -  constructed in form of a Wiki. That means that every vArranger owner can edit this manual. Please feel free to complete the manual with your experience, or simply correct simple language mistakes, using the &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; button, on top of every page. Make practical examples so that new users will profit from your know how. The moderator of this wiki (Dan) will proof read the manual and will correct what is not accurate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thanks to all vArranger Users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dan&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=483</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=483"/>
		<updated>2015-12-18T15:24:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Welcome to the vArranger Online Manual.&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:VAWikiLogo.png]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;        &amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[1. OVERVIEW]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[2. PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION ]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[3. FEATURES]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[4. INSTALLATION ]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[5. FUNCTIONS vA2]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.1. THE MAIN PROGRAM WINDOWS]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.2. TRANSPOSE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.3. REALTIME DISPLAY]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.4. OCTAVE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.5. BASS]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.6. RIGHT]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.7. VOICE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.8. MY SOUNDS]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.9. MY SONGS]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.10. MIXER]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.11. REALTIME ARRANGER]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.12. STATUS ARRANGER]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[6. ERRORS AND WARNINGS]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[VSTi | 7. USING VST INSTRUMENTS]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[8. CONTACT]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[9. APPENDIX]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
INTRODUCTION&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
This is the online manual of &#039;&#039;&#039;vArranger&#039;&#039;&#039;  - The Virtual Arranger Software -  constructed in form of a Wiki. That means that every vArranger owner can edit this manual. Please feel free to complete the manual with your experience, or simply correct simple language mistakes, using the &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; button, on top of every page. Make practical examples so that new users will profit from your know how. The moderator of this wiki (Dan) will proof read the manual and will correct what is not accurate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thanks to all vArranger Users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dan&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.11._REALTIME_ARRANGER&amp;diff=482</id>
		<title>5.11. REALTIME ARRANGER</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.11._REALTIME_ARRANGER&amp;diff=482"/>
		<updated>2015-12-18T14:35:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;GordonS: /* CHANGE */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== REAL TIME CONTROL ARRANGER ==&lt;br /&gt;
The  control  of  the  arranger  comes  in  different  aspects,  depending  on  the  origin  of  STYLE &lt;br /&gt;
loaded. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig72.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig73.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== INTRO ===&lt;br /&gt;
By  default,  no  INTRO  is  selected &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; provides  up  to  three  reasons  for  the  introduction  of simpler  (No.  1  or  A)  to  the  richest  (3,  C),  the  length  of  the  introductory  units  is  variable depending  on  the  style  but  never  less  than  one  degree.  It  appears  in  the  FRAME  (blue horizontal thermometer). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Arranger Off, you select the intro pattern (1, 2 or3), the button turns red, pressing START starts arranger INTRO preselected to bind the A CHANGE CHANGE or any other previously selected &lt;br /&gt;
. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible during the game to a replay INTRO, you only have to click on the reason for his choice. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== VARIATION ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; offers according to the origin of the style variations up to 4 A, B, C, D or RIFF and up to 5 FILL IN. These variations each have a different pattern of support in general from simple &amp;quot;A&amp;quot; to the richest &amp;quot;D&amp;quot; some original Ketron styles offer RIFF instead of change &amp;quot;D&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
RIFF  is  a  pre  recorded  musical  phrase  of  several  measures.  Up  to  32  steps,  its  length  is indicated by the blue horizontal thermometer part A, the harmonic grid rotates in the tone of the recent  agreement  struck  before  entering  this  variation.  This  feature  is  very  popular  for enhancing the musician&#039;s improvisation on a given grid. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The change over is indicated by the blue color of the button. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== FILL IN ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; provides up to three reasons for FILL IN BREAK more for Ketron styles and up to 5 FILL &lt;br /&gt;
IN for YAMAHA styles. By default, no FILL is selected, the buttons change color upon selection. &lt;br /&gt;
Arranger Off, selecting a fill / BREAK will start the arranger on the FILL / BREAK preset from its &lt;br /&gt;
start. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  framework  is  provided  with  a  button [[File:Fig73a.jpg | 60px]] which  turns  red  when  selected.  This automatically starts a fill when changing CHANGE according to the following arrangement:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle10.jpg | 360px | center]] &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ENDING ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; provides up to four reasons for terminating the simplest to the most wealthy, the length of the reasons for terminating the style varies but never less than one degree. It appears in the FRAME (blue horizontal thermometer). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : If you start the arranger on ENDING, &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; will stop at the end of the pattern end. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
All  commands  can  be  assigned  by  the  arranger  OPTIONS  /  CONTROLLERS  then CONDUCTOR menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MARKERS ===&lt;br /&gt;
When &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; reads  a  sequence,  the  control  panel  of  the  arranger  becomes  bulletin  board MARKERS which look like.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig74.jpg | 640px | center]] &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A  marker  is  used  for  storing  a  MIDI  file  in  a  precise  position.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039; display the markers present in the MIDI file, in the area of variations arranger. Clicking on a marker &lt;br /&gt;
buttons, reading the MIDI file directly to the start position of this marker.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If  the  MIDI  file  is  being  played,  the  position  change  will  take  place  at  the  end  of  the  measurement, for a smooth transition. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is very useful if you eg public requires additional chorus. You click on the marker Chorus, and  at  the  end  of  the  current  measurement,  a  chorus will  be  chained  perfectly. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In &#039;&#039;&#039;OPTIONS / CONTROLLERS, it is possible to assign up to 15 tags to MIDI buttons, keys or PC ... (Section MARKERS).&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to use the functions assigned to CHANGE CHANGE UP and DOWN arranger keys to move through the markers, with the ability to support several times in a row. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The third option is to use the control usually assigned to variations in key arranger. To do this, use an editor of MIDI files and name tags, so that they contain: Intro Intro 1 or 2 or 3 or Intro or Ending Ending 1 Ending 2 or 3 or 4 or Ending Main Main A or B or C or Main Hand D or Fill In Fill In 1 or 2 or 3 or Fill In Fill In Break.Par example, if the marker is called &amp;quot;Main C&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Solo Guitar  Hand  C&amp;quot;,  you  can  go  to  the  position  of  the  marker  by  pressing  the  button  or  pedal &lt;br /&gt;
assigned to variation 3 arranger.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>GordonS</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>